TW499809B - Quick connect parameter exchange - Google Patents

Quick connect parameter exchange Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW499809B
TW499809B TW89118159A TW89118159A TW499809B TW 499809 B TW499809 B TW 499809B TW 89118159 A TW89118159 A TW 89118159A TW 89118159 A TW89118159 A TW 89118159A TW 499809 B TW499809 B TW 499809B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
information sequence
patent application
scope
frame
item
Prior art date
Application number
TW89118159A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Sverrir Olafsson
Original Assignee
Conexant Systems Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US09/393,616 external-priority patent/US6912276B1/en
Priority claimed from US09/394,018 external-priority patent/US6768791B1/en
Priority claimed from US09/557,233 external-priority patent/US6704399B1/en
Application filed by Conexant Systems Inc filed Critical Conexant Systems Inc
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW499809B publication Critical patent/TW499809B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Facsimiles In General (AREA)
  • Telephonic Communication Services (AREA)

Abstract

The startup, retrain, renegotiation quick connect or other processes of handshaking between communication systems involve the exchange of certain modulation, constellation, precoder, prefilter and other communication related information. The communication systems exchange one long information sequence including all the necessary communication information. Subsequently, the communication systems start transmitting short sequences, including an acknowledgement information portion. If one of the communication systems does not receive an acknowledgement within a predetermined time or event, that communication system may retransmit another long information sequence. After such retransmission, the retransmitting communication system may continue transmitting the long information sequences or may start transmitting the short sequences once again. Eventually, each of the communication systems should receive a long information sequence and acknowledge their receipt of such sequence.

Description

499809 A7 ________________________ B7 五、發明說明(1 ) 發明領域 本發明係關於通訊系統。特別地,本發明關於加速通 訊系統之間的連接時間。 發明背景 56kbps數據機現已根據ITU V·90建議 而標準化。但是,很多5 6 k b p s數據機,特別是終端 使用者終端機,僅可與諸如K 5 6 f 1 e X、V . 3 4、 V · FC、及V · 32等先前模式並容。這些先前的數據 機、以及可向下並容的V · 9 0數據機在撥接及全速資料 模式之間具有不希望的長連接或初始時間。啓動時間可達 3 0秒,這對終端用戶,特別是慮及以總是連接方式操作 之其它資料通訊協定而言,是相當煩人及不具吸引力。 支援先前的數據機通信協定之V · 9 0數據機典型上 在初始期間執行表1中所示的功能。與表1中所揭示之操 作有關的時間會視諸如伺服器速度及頻道條件等不同因素 而隨著不同連接而改變。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) # 訂------!線- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 4- 499809 A7 L、發明說明(2 ) ---_ ^__^ 操作 時間(秒)」 撥接 1 1—— 建立通話 1 V·8bis 交換能力 3.5 V.8 交換能力 3.5 ^•90 Phase 2 搜尋及測距 1.5 ^•90 Phase 3 數位損傷學習;初始APCM訓練 8.5 V·90Phase 4 最後APCM訓練;設定功率位準;星 座傳送 2.5 V.42/V.42bis 錯誤校正;資料壓縮 0.5 -— 簽入 0.5-5 總 數 =22.5-27.0 表1 一傳統的V.90數據機啓動 V · 8 b i s操作包含相當長的暫停時間,此暫停時 間包括與操作有關的時段之大部份。此操作詳細說明於 ITU - T建議V · 8b i s (國際電信聯盟,1996 年8月),其內容於此倂入參考。如同ITU—T建議 V.8 (國際電信聯盟,1998年二月)中所述, V · 8 b i s協定係V · 8協定之延伸,其內容此處一倂 作爲參考。根據V · 8 b i s及/或V · 8,二數據機裝 置會交換它們個別的能力以致於在後續的初始化及資料通 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 訂---------線一 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -5 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 五、發明說明(3 ) 訊程序期間可利用並容的協定。 利用不同的V · 9 0啓動階段以決定類比及數位頻道 ’或是訓練數據機的等化器,或者嘗試使目前的通訊活動 最佳化。V · 9 0啓動階段的細節及v · 9 0數據機的其 匕觀點見於I 丁 U — T建議V · 9 Q中(國際電信聯盟, 1998年九月),其內容於此倂入參考。雖然不管客戶 數據機的區域或狀態爲何,均需要表1中所示之V · 9 0 啓動區段的部份,但是,在與相同(或幾乎一致的)頻道 特性相關的重覆連接時,可免除或縮短很多操作。 在傳統的V · 9 0數據機系統中,會於V · 4 2 / V · 4 2 b i s階段執行錯誤校正及資料壓縮技術。 V · 42的特點係包含於ITU - T建議V · 42中(國 際電信聯盟,1 9 9 6年1 0月),其內容於此一倂作爲 參考。V · 42b i s的特點包含於ITU — T建議 V· 42b is中(國際電信聯盟,1990年一月), 其內容於此一倂作爲參考。V · 4 2操作希望數據機操作 能夠以實際上「無誤差」之模式執行登入程式。登入程序 可以以C H A P及P A P協定執行;在諸如客戶電腦與網 際網路服務提供者伺服器之間的連接等點對點協定( P P P )連接的情形中,可因安全目的而使用此二者。從 V · 9 0數據機裝置的觀點而言,登入資訊會被當作資料 傳送。一旦執行登入程序時,撥接連接會完成且資料會於 伺服器與客戶相關的主電腦軟體之間傳送。 網際網路廣泛作爲日常硏究、娛樂、及通訊工具,增 --111 -----r--I ^-----111 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公f ) -6 - 499809 A7 ~^一麵 _B7 五、發明說明(4 ) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) Μ T 5 6 k b p S數據機的使用。但是,很多頻道僅能支 @ _如V · 3 4等先前模式。因此,雖然大部份較新的數 »機(特別是那些與新的個人電腦一起銷售之數據機)與 V · 9〇建議並容,很多先前模式仍然在使用。倒退回先 _ ί莫式的V · 9 0數據機相關之長初始化時間在很多應用 Ψ是擾人的且非所需,並且對使用者在未預期之斷線之後 胃ΪΙ即建立連接之情形將爲嚴重阻礙。此外,即使在二 V · 9 〇數據機裝置之間的連接之情形中,長的V · 9 0 啓動階段會考驗沒耐心的終端使用者之耐性。因此,高度 $待減少一般與傳統V . 9 0數據機系統相關的初始化時 間。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 給定的數據機通訊活動可能因爲很多原因而中斷或斷 線。舉例而言,通話等待訊號可能會中斷數據機連接,以 致於數據機通話必須再連接或重新初始化。另一實施例, 可將目前的數據機連接置於等待以令使用者能夠回答進來 的通話以回應通話等待訊號或令使用者能夠播接外送通話 而不會中斷數據機連接。理想上,能以立即方式,重建數 據機連接。但是,在實際的系統中,必須執行再訓練或再 初始化程序以確保二端裝置適當地同步及確保頻道適當地 等化。如上所述,在此再訓練及再初始化期,間傳統的 V · 9 0數據機系統必須耗費2 0秒以上。因此,也希望 能減少相同數據機裝置之間的再連接時間以回應資料通訊 中的暫時斷線或暫時中斷。 在諸如資料發訊速率、碼化前係數、頻譜整型、星座 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)499809 A7 ________________________ B7 V. Description of the Invention (1) Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a communication system. In particular, the invention relates to speeding up the connection time between communication systems. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 56 kbps modems are now standardized in accordance with ITU V · 90 recommendations. However, many 5 kb ps modems, especially end-user terminals, can only be compatible with previous modes such as K 5 6 f 1 e X, V. 3 4, V · FC, and V · 32. These previous modems, as well as down-capable V · 90 modems, had undesirably long connections or initial times between dial-up and full-speed data modes. The startup time can reach 30 seconds, which is quite annoying and unattractive for end users, especially considering other data communication protocols that operate in always-connect mode. V.90 modems that support previous modem protocols typically perform the functions shown in Table 1 during the initial period. The time associated with the operations disclosed in Table 1 will vary with different connections depending on factors such as server speed and channel conditions. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) # Order ------! Line-Printed by the Consumers' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper is printed in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) Mm) 4- 499809 A7 L. Description of the invention (2) ---_ ^ __ ^ Operating time (seconds) "Dial 1 1—— Establish a call 1 V · 8bis exchange capacity 3.5 V.8 exchange capacity 3.5 ^ • 90 Phase 2 search and ranging 1.5 ^ • 90 Phase 3 digital impairment learning; initial APCM training 8.5 V · 90Phase 4 final APCM training; set power level; constellation transmission 2.5 V.42 / V.42bis error correction; data compression 0.5 -— Check-in 0.5-5 Total = 22.5-27.0 Table 1 A V.90 modem starts V. 8 bis operation contains a considerable pause time, this pause time includes most of the time period related to the operation. This operation is described in detail in ITU-T recommendation V 8b i s (International Telecommunication Union, August 1996), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. As stated in ITU-T Recommendation V.8 (International Telecommunication Union, February 1998), the V · 8 bis agreement is an extension of the V · 8 agreement, and its contents are hereby incorporated by reference. According to V · 8 bis and / or V · 8, the two modem devices will exchange their individual abilities so that they will be initialized and communicated in the future (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Order --- ------ Line 1 Printed by the Employees 'Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper is printed in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -5 499809 Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 V. Description of Invention (3) Agreements that can be used during the communication process. Use different V · 90 start-up stages to determine analog and digital channels' or equalizers for training modems, or try to optimize current communication activity. The details of the V · 90 start-up phase and the v · 90 modem's point of view can be found in I D U—T Recommendation V · 9 Q (International Telecommunication Union, September 1998), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Although regardless of the region or status of the customer modem, the V · 90 activation section shown in Table 1 is required, but when repeating connections related to the same (or almost identical) channel characteristics, Many operations can be eliminated or shortened. In a traditional V · 90 modem system, error correction and data compression techniques are performed at the V · 4 2 / V · 4 2 b s stage. The characteristics of V · 42 are included in ITU-T Recommendation V · 42 (International Telecommunication Union, October 1996), the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference. The characteristics of V · 42b i s are contained in ITU-T Recommendation V · 42b is (International Telecommunication Union, January 1990), the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference. V · 4 2 operation hopes that the modem operation can execute the login program in a virtually "error-free" mode. The login procedure can be performed using CH A P and P A P protocols; in the case of a point-to-point protocol (P P P) connection such as a connection between a client computer and an Internet service provider server, both can be used for security purposes. From the perspective of the V · 90 modem device, the login information is transmitted as data. Once the login process is performed, the dial-up connection is completed and data is transferred between the server and the client's relevant host computer software. The Internet is widely used as a daily research, entertainment, and communication tool, adding --111 ----- r--I ^ ----- 111 (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 male f) -6-499809 A7 ~ ^ One side_B7 V. Description of invention (4) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Μ Use of T 5 6 kbp S modem. However, many channels can only support previous modes such as @ _ such as V · 3 4. Therefore, although most newer computers (especially those that are sold with new personal computers) are compatible with V · 90 recommendations, many previous models are still in use. Back to the first _ Mo mode V · 9 0 modem-related long initialization time in many applications is irritating and undesired, and for the user to establish a connection after an unexpected disconnection Will be a serious obstacle. In addition, even in the case of a connection between two V.90 modem devices, the long V.90 startup phase will test the patience of impatient end users. Therefore, the height $ is to be reduced by the initialization time typically associated with traditional V.90 modem systems. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A given modem communication activity may be interrupted or disconnected for many reasons. For example, a call waiting signal may interrupt the modem connection so that the modem call must be reconnected or reinitialized. In another embodiment, the current modem connection can be put on standby so that the user can answer the incoming call in response to the call waiting signal or enable the user to broadcast an outgoing call without interrupting the modem connection. Ideally, the computer connection can be rebuilt in an immediate manner. However, in an actual system, a retraining or reinitialization procedure must be performed to ensure that the two-terminal devices are properly synchronized and that the channels are properly equalized. As mentioned above, during this retraining and reinitialization period, the traditional V · 90 modem system must take more than 20 seconds. Therefore, it is also desirable to reduce the reconnection time between the same modem devices in response to a temporary disconnection or temporary interruption in data communication. In terms of data transmission rate, pre-encoding coefficient, spectrum integer, constellation

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(5 ) 資訊等參數更換期間’會發生數據機訓練及協商之一主要 耗時部份。參考圖5,舉例而言,其顯示v · 9 0協商期 間類比脈沖碼調變(A P C Μ )數據機5 8 〇會傳送星座 參數(C Ρ )框5 1 0至數位脈沖碼調變(d P S Μ )數 據機5 9 0,數位脈沖碼調變(D P s Μ )數據機5 9 0 在交換時會傳送調變參數(Μ Ρ )框5 2 0給A P C Μ數 據機580。如下所述,ΜΡ框520及CP框510係 處於同步形式且包含很多資訊及用於檢錯目的之C R C資 訊位元(參考圖1 7及1 8 )。 如圖5所示,A P C Μ數據機5 8 0會連續地傳送 CP框510給DPCM數據機590直至APCM數據 機5 8 0從D P C Μ數據機5 9 0收到傳送的C Ρ框 5 1 〇之一的接收確認爲止。同樣地,D P C Μ數據機 5 9 0會連續地傳送Μ Ρ框5 2 0給A P C Μ數據機 5 8 0直至DP CM數據機5 9 0從AP CM數據機 5 8 0收到傳送的C P框5 2 0之一的接收確認爲止。 用於C P框5 1 0的接收確認會以Μ P框5 2 0的形 式傳送,包含個別的及每一位元資訊並具有設定爲'' 1 〃 之Μ Ρ框5 2 0的確認位元3 3。具有設定爲、、1 〃之確 認位元3 3之Μ Ρ框5 2 0會以Μ Ρ /框5 2 2表示。一 旦DPCM數據機590收到CP框510,則DPCM 數據機5 9 0會開始傳送Μ Ρ >框5 2 2而非Μ Ρ框 5 2 0。此Μ Ρ /框5 2 2的重覆傳送會繼續直到 DP CM數據機5 9 0收到ΜΡ或ΜΡ /框5 2 0或 JI.--1 ^------------ί--訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -8 - 499809 A7 ---- B7 五、發明說明(6 ) 5 2 2之接收確認爲止。 <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 類似於D P C Μ數據機5 9 0,來自A P C Μ數據機 5 8 〇的接收確認會以c Ρ框5 1 0的形式傳送,包含個 別的及每一位元資訊並具有設定爲、、1 〃之C Ρ框5 1 0 的確認位元3 3。具有設定爲、、1 〃之確認位元3 3之 CP框5 1 〇會以CP /框5 1 2表示。一旦APCM數 據機580收到ΜΡ框520,則APCM數據機580 會開始傳送C Ρ >框5 1 2而非C Ρ框5 1 0。此C Ρ 一 框5 1 2的重覆傳送會一直繼續直到A P C Μ數據機 5 8 0收到C Ρ或C Ρ /框5 1 0或5 1 2之接收確認爲 止。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 這些包含資訊位元之長CP、Cp/、ΜΡ及Μρ/ 框的重覆傳送事實上是相當大的消耗。但是,隨著數據摩 之間必須交換更多的參數及資訊位元,此問題在諸如 I TU V · 9 2建議等下一代的標準中變得更加顯著。 圖1 9係顯示稱爲C P a框1 9 0 0之AP CM數據機 5 8 0之星座參數框之實施例。如同所示,C P a框包含 比C P及MP框1 8 0 0和1 9 0 0更多的資訊位元(參 見圖17、18及19),舉例而言,具有高解析度之星 座資訊以及前碼化器和前濾波器係數。C P a框1 9 0 0 又包含諸如參數1 1 9 2 0等可變長度參數,其可能增加 更多資訊位元給C P a框1 9 0 0。 由於I T U建議V · 3 4中導入確認機制且I T U建 議V · 9 0中再使用確認機制,所以,因爲這些長的序列 -9- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 499809 A7 ____B7 五、發明說明(7 ) 而使I T U建議V · 9 2之啓動時間過度增加。舉例而言 ,在V · 9 2 PCM上鏈啓動期間,需要在DPCM數 據機5 9 0與A P C Μ數據機5 8 0之間交換顯著的資訊 量。特別地,D P C Μ數據機5 9 0需要傳送很長的序列 ’包含C P a框中具有高解析度之星座資訊以及前碼化器 及前濾波器係收。 因此,此技藝中強烈需要消除這些包含很多參數及資 訊位元之很長序列之重覆傳送的巨大消耗,藉以降低訓練 及協商時間並取得快速連接。 發明槪述 本發明提供縮短與採用數據機之資料通訊系統相關的 啓動及再連接的時間之技術。快速再連接技術使先前連接 之已知頻道特性取得平衡以減少後續嘗試再連接相同的二 數據機裝置相關之重新初始化時間減少。根據一說明實施 •例,利用本發明的技術以減少依循諸如P P P等較高層協 定之通訊活動的重新連線時間。雖然未限於任何特定數據 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 訂-------率 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 化一一一E 搜,行以 始而、術執 , 初例練技序 法 除舉訓動次 方 消,始啓同 之 以理初機不 間 用處 、據以 時 可之習數或 線 序用學的間 連 程採傷統時 新 接般損傳同 重 連一位於不 的 再機數較在 關 及據、相能 相 動數 8 , 術 統 啓 ο · 外技 系 速 9V此線 輸 快· 、。連 傳 ,VS 等新 料 是或 i 等重 資 但份 b 、及。少 , 部 8 距動作減 用的 ·測啓操以 應定V及速些 機協,.尋快某 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -10- 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(8 ) 一形式執行本發明的上述及其它觀點,資料傳輸系統係具 有第一裝置,第一裝置係配置成於通訊頻道上與第二裝置 通訊。說明之方法係關於在第一裝置及第二裝置之間於通 訊頻道上建立通訊活動、取得一些用於資料傳輸系統之與 通訊頻道相關之操作參數、及在第二裝置儲存至少一操作 參數。在通訊活動中暫停之後,會於第二裝置處再叫出操 作參數。 根據本發明的一觀點,在通訊系統之間之啓動、保持 、重新協商、快速連線或其它握手處理期間,通訊系統會 交換一些參數,舉例而言,調變、星座、前碼化器、前濾 波器及其它通訊相關資訊。通訊系統會交換包含所需參數 或通訊資訊之一長資訊序列。接著,通訊系統開始傳送短 序列,包含確認資訊部份,但非所有嵌入於長序列中之其 它參數或資訊。一旦每一通訊系統收到具有代表收到長資 訊序列的確認資訊之短序列時,通訊系統可移至握手處理 的下一階段。短資訊序列的使用實際上縮短了握手處理及 消除長資訊序列的連續傳送和再傳送所引入之延遲及消耗 〇 在本發明的另一觀點中,假使通訊系統之一未在預定 時間或事件之內收到確認序列時,則該通訊系統可重新傳 送另一長資訊序列。接著,重新傳送通訊系統可繼續傳送 長資訊序列或可再度開始傳送短序列。 進一步參考後述之圖式反說明,本發明的這些及其它 觀點將更加淸楚。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -· «ϋ 11 n n _ 訂---------線‘ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -11 - 499809Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (5) During the replacement of information and other parameters ’, one of the main time-consuming parts of modem training and negotiation will occur. Referring to FIG. 5, for example, it shows that the analog pulse code modulation (APC M) modem 5 8 0 during the negotiation of v · 90 will transmit the constellation parameter (CP) frame 5 1 0 to the digital pulse code modulation (d (PS Μ) modem 590, digital pulse code modulation (DP s) modem 590 will transmit modulation parameter (MP) frame 5 2 0 to APC Μ modem 580 during the exchange. As described below, the MP frame 520 and the CP frame 510 are in a synchronous form and contain a lot of information and C R C information bits for error detection purposes (refer to FIGS. 17 and 18). As shown in FIG. 5, the APC M modem 5 8 0 will continuously transmit the CP frame 510 to the DPCM modem 590 until the APCM modem 5 8 0 receives the transmitted CP frame 5 1 from the DPC M modem 5 9 0. Until the receipt of the confirmation. Similarly, the DPC M modem 5 9 0 will continuously transmit the MP frame 5 2 0 to the APC M modem 5 8 0 until the DP CM modem 5 9 0 receives the transmitted CP frame from the AP CM modem 5 8 0. 5 2 0 until receiving confirmation. The reception confirmation for CP frame 5 10 will be transmitted in the form of MP frame 5 2 0, which contains individual and per-bit information and has a confirmation bit set to Μ frame 5 2 0 3 3. MP frame 5 2 0 with confirmation bits 3 3 set to 1, 1 will be represented by MP / frame 5 2 2. Once the DPCM modem 590 receives the CP frame 510, the DPCM modem 590 will start transmitting MP > frame 5 2 instead of MP frame 5 2 0. This repeated transmission of MP / box 5 2 2 will continue until DP CM modem 5 9 0 receives MP or MP / box 5 2 0 or JI .-- 1 ^ ----------- -ί--Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -8- 499809 A7 ---- B7 V. Description of the invention (6) 5 2 2 Acceptance confirmation. < Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Similar to DPC Μ modem 5 9 0, the reception confirmation from APC Μ modem 5 8 〇 will be transmitted in the form of CP box 5 1 0, including individual And each bit of information and has a confirmation bit 3 3 of the CP frame 5 1 0 set to 1,. A CP frame 5 1 0 with a confirmation bit 3 3 set to 1, 1 will be represented by CP / frame 5 1 2. Once the APCM modem 580 receives the MP box 520, the APCM modem 580 will start transmitting CP > Box 5 1 2 instead of CP Box 5 10. This repeated transmission of C P 1 frame 5 1 2 will continue until AP C M modem 5 8 0 receives C P or C P / frame 5 1 0 or 5 1 2 reception confirmation. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The repeated transmission of the CP, Cp /, MP, and Mρ / boxes containing information bits is actually a considerable consumption. However, as more parameters and information bits have to be exchanged between data modules, this problem becomes more significant in next-generation standards such as the I TU V · 9 2 recommendation. FIG. 19 shows an embodiment of a constellation parameter box of an AP CM modem 5800 called a CP box 1900. As shown, the CP a box contains more information bits than the CP and MP boxes 1 800 and 19 0 0 (see Figures 17, 18, and 19). For example, high-resolution constellation information and Pre-decoder and pre-filter coefficients. The C P a box 1 9 0 0 also contains variable length parameters such as the parameter 1 1 9 2 0, which may add more information bits to the C P a box 1 9 0 0. Because the confirmation mechanism is introduced in ITU Recommendation V · 34 and the confirmation mechanism is reused in ITU Recommendation V · 90, because of these long sequences-9- This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 (Mm) 499809 A7 ____B7 V. Description of the invention (7) Excessively increased the startup time of ITU Recommendation V · 92. For example, during the V · 92 PCM on-chain startup, a significant amount of information needs to be exchanged between the DPCM data machine 590 and the AP PC data machine 580. In particular, the DPCM 590 needs to transmit a long sequence ′, which contains constellation information with high resolution in the CP frame and the precoder and prefilter are received. Therefore, in this technique, there is a strong need to eliminate the huge consumption of repeated transmission of these long sequences containing many parameters and information bits, so as to reduce training and negotiation time and obtain fast connections. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention provides a technique for shortening the startup and reconnection time associated with a data communication system using a modem. The fast reconnect technology balances the previously known channel characteristics to reduce the reinitialization time associated with subsequent attempts to reconnect the same two modem devices. According to an illustrative implementation example, the technology of the present invention is used to reduce the reconnection time following communication activities that follow higher-level agreements such as P P P. Although it is not limited to any specific data (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Order ------- Rate printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy, one by one, E search, start with However, in addition to the practice, the first example of the practice method is not only to move the training to the next elimination, but also to start with the reason to use the machine in the beginning, according to the practice or the line sequence to learn from time to time. When the new connection is lost, the number of re-connected machines that are not connected is more important than the relevant data, and the number of phases can be 8. The technical system starts. · The foreign technology department speeds 9V and the line loses faster. According to successive reports, new materials such as VS are heavy assets such as i but shares b and. Less, mini 8-pitch motion reduction · Test start operation should be set to V and faster machine associations. Seek a certain paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -10- 499809 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (8) The above and other aspects of the invention are implemented in a form. The data transmission system has a first device, and the first device is configured to communicate with the second device on a communication channel. The illustrated method is about establishing communication activities on a communication channel between a first device and a second device, obtaining some operating parameters related to the communication channel for a data transmission system, and storing at least one operating parameter on the second device. After the communication activity is paused, the operating parameters will be called again at the second device. According to an aspect of the present invention, during startup, maintenance, renegotiation, fast connection, or other handshake processing between communication systems, the communication system exchanges some parameters, such as modulation, constellation, precoder, Front filters and other communications related information. The communication system exchanges a long message sequence containing the required parameters or communication information. Then, the communication system starts to send short sequences, including the confirmation information part, but not all other parameters or information embedded in the long sequence. Once each communication system receives a short sequence with a confirmation message representing the receipt of the long message sequence, the communication system may move to the next stage of the handshake process. The use of short information sequences actually shortens the delay and consumption introduced by the handshake process and eliminates the continuous transmission and retransmission of long information sequences. In another aspect of the present invention, if one of the communication systems does not arrive at a predetermined time or event, When the confirmation sequence is received, the communication system can resend another long information sequence. Then, the retransmission communication system can continue to transmit the long information sequence or can start transmitting the short sequence again. These and other aspects of the present invention will be made clearer with further reference to the following counter-illustrations. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) '' Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -11-499809

五、發明說明(9 ) 配合附圖,參考詳細說明及申請專利範圍,可對本發 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 明更完整地暸解,其中在圖式中類似的代號係指類似的元 件,及: 圖1係方塊圖,說明能夠支援點對點協定(p p p ) 連接之一般數據機系統環境; 圖2係根據本發明之一般快速啓動處理的流程圖; 圖3係方塊圖,說明根據本發明之數據機系統; 圖4係流程圖,說明二數據機裝置執行的快速啓動處 理之部份; 圖5係對應於二數據機裝置執行的快速啓動處理之時 序圖; 圖6係對應於二數據機裝置執行的快速重新連線處理 之時序圖; 圖7係二數據機裝置執行的快速重新連線處理之流程 圖; 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖8 - 1 5係對應於不同的收據機待機、重新連線、 及話終情形之時序圖; 圖1 6係數據機系統的方塊圖,其中倂入本發明的不 同觀點; 圖1 7係說明實施例調變參數(Μ P )框中的位元之 定義; 圖1 8係說明實施例星座參數(C Ρ )框中的位元之 定義; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) _ - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 ------ B7 五、發明說明(10 ) _ 1 9係說明用於類比數據機(C P a )框之實施例 星座參數中的位元之定義; 圖2 0係說明實施例短調變參數(Μ P s )框中的位 元之定義; 圖2 1係說明實施例短星座參數(C P s )框中的位 元之定義; 圖2 2係說明用於類比數據機(C P a s )框之實施 例短星座參數中的位元之定義; 圖2 3係說明根據I T U V · 3 4建議之傳統調變 參數(Μ P )框之交換的實施例; 圖2 4 a係說明根據本發明的一實施例之調變參數( Μ P )框的快速交換之實施例; 圖2 4 b係說明根據本發明的一實施例之調變參數( Μ P )框與星座參數(C P )框的快速交換之實施例; 圖2 4 c係說明根據本發明的一實施例之星座參數( C Ρ )框與用於類比數據機之星座參數框(c P a )的快 速交換之實施例; 圖2 5 a係說明根據本發明的一實施例之錯誤框傳送 的情形中調變參數(Μ P )框的快速交換之實施例; 圖2 5 b係說明根據本發明的一實施例之錯誤框傳送 的情形中調變參數(Μ P )框與星座參數(c P )框的快 速交換之實施例; 圖2 5 c係說明根據本發明的一實施例之錯誤框傳送 的情形中星座參數(C Ρ )框與用於類比數據機(C p a 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) JI---- ------------r---訂-------!線^^ (請先閱讀背面之注音3事項再填寫本頁) ^809 A7 _B7 _ i'發明說明(H ) ^ $星座參數框之快速交換之實施例; 圖2 6係說明根據本發明的一實施例之發生於 A p C Μ與D P C Μ之間的速率重協商處理之實施例 圖2 7係說明根據本發明的一實施例之發生於 A p C Μ與D P C Μ之間快速連接訓練處理之實施例 圖2 8係說明根據本發明的一實施例之發生於 A P C Μ與D P C Μ之間快速連接訓練處理之實施例 及 及V. Description of the invention (9) With reference to the detailed description and the scope of patent application, please refer to the detailed description and the scope of patent application (please read the note on the back? Matters and then fill out this page) to understand more completely. Refers to similar components, and: Figure 1 is a block diagram illustrating a general modem system environment capable of supporting point-to-point protocol (ppp) connections; Figure 2 is a flowchart of a general quick start process according to the present invention; Figure 3 is a block diagram Illustrates the modem system according to the present invention; FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the fast startup process performed by the two modem device; FIG. 5 is a timing chart corresponding to the fast startup process performed by the two modem device; It is a sequence diagram corresponding to the fast reconnection process performed by the two modem devices. Figure 7 is a flowchart of the fast reconnection process performed by the two modem devices. Figure 8-1 printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5 is a sequence diagram corresponding to different receipt, standby, reconnection, and end-of-talk situations; Figure 16 is a block diagram of a 6-series modem system, in which the Different perspectives; Figure 17 illustrates the definition of the bits in the modulation parameter (MP) box of the embodiment; Figure 18 illustrates the definition of the bits in the constellation parameter (CP) box of the embodiment; this paper scale applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) _-Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 ------ B7 V. Description of Invention (10) _ 1 9 series instructions are used for The definition of the bits in the constellation parameter of the embodiment of the analog data machine (CP a) frame; FIG. 20 illustrates the definition of the bits in the short modulation parameter (MPs) frame of the embodiment; FIG. 21 illustrates the embodiment The definition of the bits in the short constellation parameter (CP s) box; Figure 2 2 illustrates the definition of the bits in the short constellation parameter for the embodiment of the analog data machine (CP as) box; · 34 suggested embodiment of exchange of traditional modulation parameter (MP) frame; Fig. 24a illustrates an embodiment of fast exchange of modulation parameter (MP) frame according to an embodiment of the present invention; 2 4 b is a description of a modulation parameter (MP) frame and a constellation parameter according to an embodiment of the present invention. CP is an example of a fast exchange of frames; FIG. 2 c illustrates a fast exchange of a constellation parameter (CP) frame according to an embodiment of the present invention and a constellation parameter frame (cPa) for an analog data machine. Embodiments; FIG. 2 a is an example illustrating a fast exchange of a modulation parameter (MP) frame in a case where an error frame is transmitted according to an embodiment of the present invention; and FIG. 2 5b illustrates an implementation according to the present invention An example of a fast exchange of a modulation parameter (MP) frame and a constellation parameter (cP) frame in the case of an error frame transmission; FIG. 2 c illustrates the transmission of the error frame according to an embodiment of the present invention. Medium constellation parameter (C PF) box and used for analog data machine (C pa This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) JI ---- --------- --- r --- Order -------! Line ^^ (Please read the note 3 on the back before filling in this page) ^ 809 A7 _B7 _ i'Invention Note (H) ^ $ Example of fast exchange of constellation parameter frame; An embodiment of an example of a rate renegotiation process that occurs between Ap C M and DPC M FIG. 27 illustrates a fast connection training that occurs between Ap C M and DPC M according to an embodiment of the present invention Example of processing FIG. 28 illustrates an example of a fast connection training process that occurs between APC M and DPC M according to an embodiment of the present invention and and

表 照 對 件 元 要 主I (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 一—i οForm Photo Contrast Element Main I (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) I—i ο

2 ο IX2 ο IX

4 ο 1—I4 ο 1—I

5 ο IX5 ο IX

8 ο IX8 ο IX

ο IXο IX

2 一—I IX 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ο ο 3 2 ο 3 4 ο 3 6 ο 3 8 ο 3 數據機系統 伺服器數據機 客戶數據機 主軟體 數位連接 數位電話網路 地方中央局 類比地方迴路 數據機系統 數據機 數據機 公眾電話網路 通訊頻道 通訊頻道 處理器 -14- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 499809 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(12 ) 3 14 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 2 0 3 5 02 I—I IX Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ο ο 3 2 ο 3 4 ο 3 6 ο 3 8 ο 3 modem system server modem client modem main software digital connection digital telephone network local central Bureau analogy local loop modem system modem modem modem public telephone network communication channel communication channel processor -14- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 499809 A7 B7 Intellectual Property of Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives V. Invention Description (12) 3 14 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 2 0 3 5 0

3 6 6 16 0 0 16 0 2 16 0 4 16 0 8 16 10 16 11 16 12 16 14 16 3 4 16 5 6 16 6 0 16 7 2 處理器 發射機 等化器結構 接收器 回音消除器結構 記憶體 接收器 等化器結構 回音消除器結構 發射機 記憶體 數據機系統 數據機裝置 數據機裝置 呼叫裝置 並聯回答裝置 串聯回答裝置 發射機區 接收器區 訊號偵測元件 來電I D元件 訊號偵測元件 切換結構 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -15- 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(13 ) 藍A實施例詳述 此處以功能方塊元件及不同處理步驟,說明本發明。 應瞭解藉由任何數目之用於執行特定功能之硬體元件,可 實現這些功能方塊。舉例而言,本發明可採用不同的積體 電路元件,舉例而言,記憶體元件、數位訊號處理元件、 邏輯元件、查詢表、等等,它們可在一或更多微處理器或 其它控制裝置之控制下,執行不同功能。此外,對於那些 習於此技藝者而言,將瞭解本發明可以以任何數目的資料 通訊內容實施,且此處所述之數據機系統僅爲發明之一說 明性應用。此外,應注意本發明可採用任何數目的資料傳 送、發訊處理及條件化等傳統技術。習於此技藝者所習知 的這些一般技術,此處不會詳述。 應瞭解此處所述及所7K之特定實施例僅爲舉例說明且 並非要限定本發明的範圍。事實上,爲了簡明起見,此處 不詳述傳統的編碼及解碼、時序恢復、自動增益控制( A G C )、同步化、訓練、及資料通訊系統的其它功能觀 點(及系統之個別操作元件的元件。此外,此處所包含之 不同圖式中所示之連接線係用以代表舉例說明之不同元件 之間的功能關係及/或實體耦合。應注意,很多可能的或 增加的功能關係或實體連接可出現在實際的通訊系統中。 圖1係方塊圖,說明一般數據機系統1 〇 〇,本發明 的技術實施於其中。爲了說明此點,假設數據機系統1 〇 能夠支援與較高層協定相關的連接,舉例而言,點對點協 定(p p P )連接。p p P連接典型上與諸如個別終端使 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -16- JI. I ^ --------^1—1T---------$· (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 _________ B7 五、發明說明(14 ) 用者及網際網路服務提供者之間的網際網路通訊相關。關 於此點’數據機系統1 〇 〇包含多個伺服器數據機(以代 號102a、 102b、及l〇2n表示)與客戶數據機 1 〇 4。伺服器數據機1 〇 2可個別地與網際網路服務提 供者或任何適當的資料源相關。客戶數據機1 〇 4可以與 諸如個人電腦等能夠執行主軟體1 〇 5之適當資料源相關 。爲了說明此點,主軟體1 〇 5可以爲諸如微軟視窗等作 業系統’或是任何能配合數據機系統1 〇 〇操作之應用程 式。雖然未顯示於圖1中,但是,客戶數據機1 〇 4可以 與個人電腦整合。 在此說明的情形中,數據機系統1 〇 〇可採用與 V · 90建議、舊有的56kbps協定、V· 34建議 等並容之56kbps數據機。雖然此處係於V· 90數 據機系統的情形下說明本發明,但是,技術可相同地應用 至V · 3 4數據機系統或任何舊有的數據機系統中。 V · 90或56kbps數據機裝置適用於數據機系統 1 〇 〇 ’其中給定的伺服器數據機1 〇 2利用連接至數位 電話網路1 0 8之數位連接1 0 6。客戶數據機1 〇 4會 經由類比地方迴路1 1 2連接至地方中央局1 1 〇。因此 ’建立於客戶數據機1 〇 4與任何伺服器數據機1 〇 2之 間的通訊頻道會以數位方式通達中央局1 1 〇。之後,數 位訊號會被轉換成類比訊號以便在地方迴路1 1 2上傳輸 〇 假使終端使用者建立網際網路連接,則主軟體1 〇 5 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -17- — I.--- ^------------^ — ^--訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(15 ) 可執行任何數目的操作以回應使用者命令。舉例而言,主 軟體1 0 5可提示客戶數據機1 0 4撥接與伺服器數據機 1 0 2 a (舉例而言,與使用者網際網路服務提供者相關 之伺服器數據機)相關的電話號碼。伺服器數據機1 0 2 a及客戶數據機1 〇 4會執行初始化等化器、回聲消除器 、傳送功率位準、資料速率、及其它與目前的通訊頻道相 關之可能的操作參數之握手常式。此外,主軟體1 0 5會 使客戶數據機1 0 4傳送及接收能使使用者經由服務提供 者登入網際網路之鑑別資料。如上所述,根據習知的 CHAP或PAP技術,可以在伺服器數據機1 0 2 a與 客戶數據機1 0 4之間交換鑑別資料。在採用非P P P較 高層協定之其它實施例中,可執行適當的登入程序以取代 CHAP或PAP程序。 如上所述,與傳統數據機系統有關之撥接連線時間( 及重新連線時間)是非所期待的長。本發明利用諸如建立 於伺服器數據機1 0 2 a與客戶數據機1 0 4之間的通訊 頻道等數據機裝置之間的通訊頻道之重覆使用。假設客戶 數據機1 0 4與位於特定區域之桌上型個人電腦有關,則 將需要於相同的類比通訊頻道上建立與任何給定的伺服器 數據機1 0 2之連接。換言之,客戶數據機1 0 4將總是 在使用端與中央局1 1 0之間建立類比頻道。不管類比頻 道因溫度及其它環境效應而造成的輕微變化爲何,客戶數 據機1 0 4的初始化(與類比頻道有關)將從一連接至另 一連接維持實際不變。 JI.--- 1------------r---^---I---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -18- A73 6 6 16 0 0 16 0 2 16 0 4 16 0 8 16 10 16 11 16 12 16 14 16 3 4 16 5 6 16 6 0 16 7 2 processor transmitter equalizer structure receiver echo canceller structure memory Body Receiver Equalizer Structure Echo Canceller Structure Transmitter Memory Modem System Modem Device Modem Device Modem Device Calling Device Parallel Answering Device Tandem Answering Device Transmitter Area Receiver Area Signal Detection Element Caller ID Element Signal Detection Element Switch Structure (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -15- 499809 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (13) The blue A embodiment will be described in detail with functional block elements and different processing steps to illustrate the present invention. It should be understood that these functional blocks can be implemented with any number of hardware components for performing specific functions. For example, the present invention can use different integrated circuit elements, such as memory elements, digital signal processing elements, logic elements, look-up tables, etc., which can be controlled by one or more microprocessors or other Under the control of the device, perform different functions. In addition, for those skilled in the art, it will be understood that the present invention can be implemented with any number of data communication content, and the modem system described herein is only one illustrative application of the invention. In addition, it should be noted that the present invention can employ any number of conventional techniques such as data transmission, message processing, and conditionalization. These general techniques, which are familiar to those skilled in the art, will not be detailed here. It should be understood that the specific embodiments described and described herein are for illustration only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. In fact, for the sake of brevity, the traditional encoding and decoding, timing recovery, automatic gain control (AGC), synchronization, training, and other functional aspects of the data communication system (and the individual operating elements of the system are not detailed here In addition, the connecting lines shown in the different drawings included here are used to represent the functional relationships and / or physical coupling between the different components illustrated. It should be noted that many possible or added functional relationships or entities The connection can occur in an actual communication system. Figure 1 is a block diagram illustrating a general modem system 100, in which the technology of the present invention is implemented. To illustrate this, it is assumed that the modem system 100 can support higher level protocols. Relevant connections, for example, point-to-point protocol (pp P) connections. Pp P connections are typically used with, for example, individual terminals to adapt this paper size to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -16- JI. I ^ -------- ^ 1—1T --------- $ · (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 49980 9 A7 _________ B7 V. Description of the invention (14) The Internet communication between the user and the Internet service provider is related. About this, the 'data machine system 1' includes multiple server data machines (code 102a) , 102b, and 102n) and client modems 104. Server modems 102 can be individually associated with Internet service providers or any suitable source of data. Client modems 104 can be associated with A suitable source of data such as a personal computer capable of executing the main software 105 may be related. To illustrate this point, the main software 105 may be an operating system such as Microsoft Windows, or any application that can operate with the modem system 100. Program. Although not shown in Figure 1, the customer modem 104 can be integrated with a personal computer. In the scenario described here, the modem system 100 can use the old 56kbps protocol recommended in V.90. It is recommended that 56 kbps modems include V. 34. Although the present invention is described in the case of a V. 90 modem system, the technology can be applied to V. 34 modem systems or Any old modem system. V · 90 or 56 kbps modem device is suitable for modem system 1 00 'where a given server modem 1 02 uses a digital connection connected to a digital telephone network 108 1 0 6. The customer modem 1 0 4 will be connected to the local central office 1 1 0 via the analog local loop 1 12. Therefore 'established in the communication between the customer modem 1 0 4 and any server modem 1 0 2 The channel will reach the Central Bureau 1 1 0 digitally. After that, the digital signal will be converted into an analog signal for transmission on the local loop 1 1 2 0 If the end user establishes an Internet connection, the main software 1 0 5 pieces of paper Standards are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) -17- — I .--- ^ ------------ ^ — ^-order ----- ---- Line (Please read the note on the back first? Please fill in this page again for details) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (15) Any number of operations can be performed in response to user commands. For example, the host software 10 5 can prompt the customer modem 1 0 4 to dial up with the server modem 1 0 2 a (for example, the server modem associated with the user's Internet service provider). Phone number. The server modem 1 0 2 a and the client modem 1 104 will initialize the equalizer, echo canceller, transmission power level, data rate, and other possible operating parameters related to the current communication channel. formula. In addition, the host software 105 will cause the customer modem 104 to transmit and receive authentication data that enables users to log in to the Internet via the service provider. As described above, according to the conventional CHAP or PAP technology, authentication data can be exchanged between the server data machine 10 2 a and the client data machine 104. In other embodiments employing non-PP higher-level protocols, a suitable login procedure may be performed instead of the CHAP or PAP procedure. As mentioned above, the dial-up connection time (and reconnection time) associated with traditional modem systems is undesirably long. The present invention utilizes the repeated use of communication channels between modem devices such as the communication channels established between the server modems 102a and the client modems 104. Assuming the client modem 104 is associated with a desktop personal computer located in a specific area, it will be necessary to establish a connection to any given server modem 104 on the same analog communication channel. In other words, the customer modem 104 will always establish an analog channel between the consumer and the central office 110. Regardless of the slight changes in the analog channel due to temperature and other environmental effects, the initialization of the client computer 104 (related to the analog channel) will remain virtually unchanged from one connection to the other. JI .--- 1 ------------ r --- ^ --- I ---- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -18- A7

499809 五、發明說明(16 ) 圖2係流一般快速啓動處理2 0 0之流程圖,其可由 諸如數據機系統1 〇 〇等資料通訊系統執行。在實際系統 中’處理2 0 0可由伺服器數據機1 〇 2、客戶數據機 1〇4、主軟體1〇5、及/或數據機系統1〇〇的任何 功能元作協力地執行。此外,在遵循任何數目的傳統數據 機協定之整個初始化程序的情形中,可實現處理2 0 〇。 快速啓動處理2 0 0會從工作2 0 0開始,工作 2 0 2係關於客戶數據機1 〇 4與伺服器數據機1 0 2之 間的通話建立有關。在本實施例的情形中,客戶數據機 1 0 4被視爲呼叫裝置。因此,主軟體1 〇 5及/或客戶 數據機1 0 4會撥接與諸如伺服器1 0 2 b相關的電話號 碼。假定伺服器數據機1 0 2 b能夠造成增加的連接,則 其會連線並以傳統方式產生適當的回應音。當二數據機裝 置均連線且彼此通訊時,會經由數位連接1 0 6、電話網 路108、中央局110、及地區迴路112,建立通訊 頻道。工作2 0 2期間所利用之撥號、響鈴、及回應程序 可遵循傳統的協定。 在工作2 0 2之後,由數據機系統1 〇 〇執行查詢工 作2 0 4以確定是否支援快速連接協定。查詢工作2 0 4 對於使不同的伺服器數據機及不同的客戶數據機能夠相互 操作及並容而言,是需要的。舉例而言,伺服器數據機 1 0 2 b可爲支援本發明的快速連接特點之V · 9 0數據 機,而客戶數據機1 0 4可爲不支援快速連接特性之舊有 5 6 k p s數據機裝置。查詢工作2 0 4可由伺服器數據 II-— ΙΓ 1 I----I -----^ — ^--^---------$ (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁} 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -19- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(17 ) 機1 0 2 b或客戶數據機1 〇 4執行。將於下詳述執行查 詢工作2 0 4之技術。當客戶數據機1 0 4啓始通話時或 當伺服器數據機1 0 2初始化通話時,可相等地執行工作 2 0 4。 假使查詢工作2 0 4判定二數據機裝置不支援快速連 接協定時,則工作2 0 6會接續在後。工作2 0 6會執行 數據機系統1 0 0以開始傳統的初始化常式。舉例而言, 在V · 3 4或V · 9 0數據機系統的情形中,工作2 0 6 可開始諸如V · 8 b i s等能力交換協定。或者,一些數 據機系統可僅實施例V · 8能力交換協定。較老的舊有數 據機系統可跳過V · 8及V · 8 b i s程序可根據舊有的 模式一起地執行適當的初始化常式。在工作2 0 6之後, 數據機系統1 0 0會根據可應用之數據機規格以執行習知 的啓動程序。舉例而言,假使數據機系統1 0 0支援 V · 9 0,則工作2 0 8可以與傳統的V · 9 0等化器訓 練、回聲消除器訓練、星座設計、功率位準確認、及其它 啓動操作相關連。假使執行工作2 0 6.及2 0 8時’則與 通訊活動有關之啓動時間基本上與傳統的V · 9 0連接之 啓動時間相同。 假使查詢工作2 0 4判斷快速連接協定被完全地支援 時,則也可執行查詢工作2 1 0。查詢工作2 1 0會測試 建立的通訊頻道之特性是否類似於先前建立的通訊頻道之 對應特性。簡而言之’快速工作2 1 0比較所收到的序列 之一或更多屬性與先前收到之先前建立的頻道相關之序列 JI. —1.--------------^--------- (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -20- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(18 ) 的儲存屬性。所收到的訊號載有關於通訊頻道的特性之資 訊。特別地,所收到的訊號會載有與類比地方迴路1 1 2 相關之資訊。 在此處所述之實施例中,其中一數據機裝置會數位地 連接至數位電話網路1 0 8,類比地方迴路1 1 2會以從 一連接至一連接實際不變的方式影響訊號。雖然對於重覆 連接至相同伺服器數據機1 0 2而言,類比特性是類似的 ,但是,溫度、濕度稍微變化、其它環境改變、系統硬體 的實體改變、及其它操作參數會造成用於比較目的之目前 頻道特性隨機波動。然而,在查詢工作2 1 0期間執行的 比較程序較佳地設計成容納這些波動。爲了便於說明起見 ,「類似的」特性意指查詢工作2 1 0將假定目前的頻道 與未遭受導因於上述不可控制及不可預測的因素之一般變 化之先前頻道相符。 假使查詢工作2 1 0判定目前的通訊頻道之參數未符 合先前通訊頻道的參數時,則可執行工作2 1 2。如同工 作2 0 6般,工作2 1 2會提示數據機系統1 0 0開始傳 統的初始化常式。在較佳實施例中,假使數據機系統 1 0 0確認快速連接協定被完全支援時(查詢工作2 0 4 ),則可跳過即使不是全部也是大多數的V · 8 b i s程 序。·因此’由工作2 1 2促成能力交換協定。接著,可執 行工作2 1 4以促使數據機系統1 〇 〇進入傳統的 V · 9 0啓動程序。工作2 1 4類似於上述工作2 0 8。 假使執行工作2 1 2及2 1 4,則與通訊活動相關的啓動 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -21 - !Ί — ΙΊ! ----l· I I I --I I I I I 1 ^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 499809 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(19 ) (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 時間可以減少約三秒,與通訊活動相關的啓動時間係執行 V · 8 b i s程序所需之典型時間。因此’即使查詢工作 2 1 0判定目前的頻道不類似於先前頻道時’快速啓動處 理2 〇 〇會減少數據機系統1 0 〇的整個初始化時間。 假使查詢工作2 1 0發現目^的頻道特性「符合」儲 存之先前建立的頻道之特性’則可執行工作2 1 6。在工 作2 1 6期間,執行縮短的訓練程序。如下詳述般,數據 機系統1 0 0會平衡目前頻道的已知特性以致於數據機裝 置可以被立即地訓練。舉例而言’雖然數位損傷之特定時 序階段(舉例而言,被奪取的位元發訊)可能是未知的, 但是,對於重覆的連接而言,數位損傷的型式將是一致的 。因此,在V · 9 0數據機系統的情形中,無須完全地執 行冗長的數位損傷學習程序。此外’無須執行等化器及回 音消除器的初始訓練、及P C Μ編解碼傳送位準和資料速 率之初始決定。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 可執行工作2 1 8以使數據機系統1 0 0能夠以初始 資料速率操作。應瞭解與工作2 1 6相關的訓練之部份可 以以與工作2 1 8相關的初始資料速率執行。藉由重新叫 出與先前儲存的頻道相關之初始化參數,數據機系統 1 0 0能夠以初始資料速率快速地操作。在工作2 1 8期 間,數據機系統1 0 0可以執行等化器及回音消除器的最 後訓練、交換調變參數、及交換用於全速率資料模式期Ρ曰1 之星座訊號點。根據本發明,在工作2 1 8配合一或更多 最後訓練序列期間,可傳送Ρ Ρ Ρ資料。舉例而言, -22- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(2〇 ) p p P資料可以與諸如CHAP或PAP等登入鑑識資訊 父換相關。在考慮工作2 1 8期間之資料傳送下,快速啓 動處理2 0 〇的此部份可以被視爲第一資料模式或是資料 階段一。 、 在工作2 1 8之後,快速啓動處理2 0 〇會促使數據 機系統1 〇 〇以最後的資料速率操作(工作2 2 〇 )。在 本實施例的情形中,處理2 0 〇的此部份可被視爲第二資 料模式或資料階段二。初始及最後資料速率之間的轉變較 佳地係以無縫方式發生;數據機系統1 〇 〇採用適當的訊 號時序或是同步技術以便能造成此資料速率轉換。在全資 料模式期間,數據機系統1 〇 〇利用工作2 1 8期間交換 的訊號點星座。一旦數據機系統進入最後資料模式中,則 快速啓動處理2 0 0結束。 圖3係方塊圖,說明根據本發明配置之數據機系統 3 0 0。數據機系統3 0 0較佳地配置成執行快速啓動處 理2 0 0及此處所述之其它處理。舉例而言,此處所述之 數據機系統3 0 0係5 6 k b p s或V . 9 0系統之情形 (或是實際上類似於V · 9 0系統之系統)。但是,應瞭 解圖3中所示之特別實施無論如何並非要限定本發明。 一般而言,數據機系統3 0 0包含諸如數據機3 0 2 之第一數據機及諸如數據機3 0 4之第二數據機。在本說 明的情形中,數據機3 0 2被視爲伺服器數據機,而數據 機3 0 4被視爲客戶數據機(參見圖1 )。應瞭解數據機 3 0 2及3 0 4可類似地配置成均能以傳送或接收模式操 I 1·--f ^--I--I I -----l·------I--I (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -23- 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 _ 五、發明說明(21 ) 作。數據機3 0 2及3 0 4通常根據習知原理配置以便經 由至少一通訊頻道(舉例而言’頻道3 〇 8及3 1 〇 )而 在諸如公眾電話網路(P S T N ) 3 0 6之電信網路上通 訊。爲了說明起見’如同配合圖1之上述所述般,數據機 302會數位地連接至PSTN306,而數據機304 會經由中央局(未顯示)及類比地方迴路而連接至 p S TN。爲了簡明起見,圖3並未顯示不同的編碼器、 解碼器、及其它典型上存在於實際的數據機系統之功能元 件。 數據機3 0 2可包含處理器元件3 1 2,而數據機 3 0 4可包含處理器元件3 1 4。除了此處所述之特定操 作之外,處理器3 1 2及3 1 4會適當地配置成執行與數 據機系統3 0 0的操作相關之不同工作。事實上,當需要 支援其功能性時,數據機系統3 0 0可倂入任何數目的處 理器、控制元件、及記憶體元件。這些處理器、控制、及 記憶體元件可適當地與數據機3 0 2及3 0 4的其它功能 元件相互作用,藉以接取及操縱資料或監視和調節數據系 統3 0 0的操作。 處理器3 1 2可以與如功能塊3 2 2所示之快速連接 確認常式操作上相關連。在查詢工作2 0 4期間,可採用 快速連接確認常式3 2 2 (參見圖2)。處理器3 1 2也 會與一些訓練常式3 2 4操作上相關連。訓練常式3 2 4 可用於數據機系統3 0 0之初始及/或最後訓練。如上所 述般,在工作2 1 6期間採用訓練常式3 2 4。處理器 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 24- I I] — — — — — — - I I I l· I I I ^ ·1111111! (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 --…… _B7_ 五、發明說明(22 ) 3 1 2也可配合撥接鑑識設計3 2 6操作,舉例而言,撥 接鑑識設計3 2 6可爲根據P A P或C H A P之資訊交換 。C H A P / P A P功能上可以以對應於數據機3 0 2之 伺服器所維持的一或更多軟體交錯地(或增加地)實現。 這些說明的操作並非要限定處理元件3 1 2的能力,處理 元件3 1 2係較佳地配置成支援任何數目的增加操作。 數據機3 0 2包含發射機3 1 6,發射機3 1 6係用 以根據傳統的資料傳送技術以傳送經過編碼的符號。這些 符號可代表數據機系統3 0 0所利用之資料、訓練序列、 同步訊號、控制訊號、資訊交換序列、及任何適當的通訊 訊號。數據機3 0 2也包含接收器3 1 8,接收器3 1 8 係根據任何數目的習知數據機技術配置的。接收器3 1 8 會配置成從數據機3 0 4接收通訊訊號;這些訊號可能包 含編碼的資訊位元、控制訊號、資訊交換序列、訓練序列 、等等。接收器3 1 8包含或是功能上相關於等化器結構 3 1 7及回音消除器結構3 1 9。等化器結構3 1 7及回 音消除器結構3 1 9的配置及操作會與諸如適應濾波演繹 法等任何數目的傳統技術一致。 數據機3 0 2較佳地配置成產生、處理、及傳送與數 據機系統3 0 0的操作相關之不同資料及訊號。爲了說明 起見,圖3係顯示與數據機系統3 0 0的不同操作特性相 關之一些方塊;這些操作特性具有相關之特定資料序列、 控制訊號、等等。雖然實際系統可處理及傳送任何數量之 增加或其它資料,但是,此處所述的特別實施例會與至少 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) _ _499809 V. Description of the invention (16) Figure 2 is a flowchart of a general quick start process 2000, which can be executed by a data communication system such as a modem system 100. In the actual system, the processing of 2000 can be performed by any function of server modem 10, customer modem 104, main software 105, and / or modem system 100. In addition, in the case of following the entire initialization procedure of any number of conventional modem protocols, processing can be achieved. Quick start processing 2 0 0 will start from work 2 0, work 2 2 is related to the establishment of a call between the customer data machine 104 and the server data machine 102. In the case of this embodiment, the customer modem 104 is regarded as a calling device. Therefore, the main software 105 and / or the customer modem 104 can dial a telephone number associated with, for example, the server 102b. Assuming that the server modem 10 2 b can cause an increased connection, it will connect and generate an appropriate response tone in a conventional manner. When the two modem devices are both connected and communicating with each other, a communication channel is established via the digital connection 106, the telephone network 108, the central office 110, and the regional circuit 112. The dialing, ringing, and response procedures used during work 202 can follow traditional protocols. After job 202, the modem system 100 performs a query job 204 to determine whether a fast connection protocol is supported. Query work 2 0 4 is needed to enable different server modems and different customer modems to operate and be compatible with each other. For example, the server modem 1 0 2 b may be a V · 90 modem that supports the fast connection feature of the present invention, and the customer modem 10 4 may be the old 5 6 kps data that does not support the fast connection feature.机 装置。 Machine device. Query work 2 0 4 can be based on server data II-— ΙΓ 1 I ---- I ----- ^ — ^-^ --------- $ (please read the note on the back first? Matters Refill this page} Printed on the paper by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy ’s Consumer Cooperatives, the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). V. Description of the invention (17) Machine 1 0 2 b or customer data machine 1 104 executes. The technology for performing inquiry work 2 4 will be described in detail below. When the customer data machine 10 4 starts a call or when it is a server When modem 1 0 2 initiates a call, it can perform work 2 0 4. If query work 2 0 4 determines that the two modem devices do not support the fast connection protocol, work 2 6 will follow. Work 2 0 6 The modem system 100 will be executed to start the conventional initialization routine. For example, in the case of a V · 34 or V · 9 0 modem system, work 2 06 may start capabilities such as V · 8 bis Exchange agreement. Alternatively, some modem systems may only implement the V. 8 capability exchange agreement. Older legacy data The system can skip V · 8 and V · 8 bis programs and can execute appropriate initialization routines together according to the old mode. After working 2 0 6, the modem system 1 0 0 will be based on the applicable modem specifications. Perform conventional startup procedures. For example, if the modem system 100 supports V · 9 0, then work 208 can work with traditional V · 90 equalizer training, echo canceller training, constellation design, The power level confirmation and other start-up operations are related. If the work is performed between 6:00 and 8:00, the start-up time related to communication activities is basically the same as the start-up time of the conventional V · 90 connection. When task 2 0 4 determines that the fast connection protocol is fully supported, query task 2 1 0 can also be performed. The query task 2 1 10 tests whether the characteristics of the established communication channel are similar to the corresponding characteristics of the previously established communication channel. In terms of 'quick work 2 1 0 compare one or more attributes of the received sequence with the previously received previously associated channel JI. —1 .------------ -^ --------- (Please read the Zhuyin on the back? Please fill in this page again.) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). Properties. The received signal contains information about the characteristics of the communication channel. In particular, the received signal contains information related to the analog local circuit 1 1 2. In the embodiment described here, one of the modem devices will be digitally connected to the digital telephone network 108, and the analog local loop 1 12 will affect the signal in a way that is virtually unchanged from one connection to the other. Although the analog characteristics are similar for repeated connections to the same server modem 102, slight changes in temperature and humidity, other environmental changes, physical changes in system hardware, and other operating parameters can cause For comparison purposes, the current channel characteristics fluctuate randomly. However, the comparison procedure performed during the query work 210 is preferably designed to accommodate these fluctuations. For the sake of explanation, "similar" characteristics mean that the query work 2 10 will assume that the current channel is consistent with a previous channel that has not suffered a general change due to the above-mentioned uncontrollable and unpredictable factors. If the query task 2 1 0 determines that the parameters of the current communication channel do not match the parameters of the previous communication channel, then task 2 1 2 may be performed. Just like job 2 06, job 2 1 2 will prompt the modem system 1 0 to start the conventional initialization routine. In the preferred embodiment, if the modem system 100 confirms that the fast connection protocol is fully supported (query work 204), it is possible to skip most, if not all, of the V8bis program. • Therefore 'Capacity exchange agreement is facilitated by work 2 1 2. Next, work 2 1 4 can be performed to cause the modem system 100 to enter the traditional V · 90 start-up procedure. Job 2 1 4 is similar to job 2 0 8 described above. Assuming the execution of work 2 1 2 and 2 1 4, the paper standard related to the activation of communication activities applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -21-! Ί — ΙΊ! ---- l · III --IIIII 1 ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 499809 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (19) (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling this page) The time can be reduced by about three seconds The start-up time associated with communication activities is the typical time required to execute the V · 8 bis program. Therefore, "even if the query work 2 1 0 determines that the current channel is not similar to the previous channel" quick start processing 2 0 0 will reduce the overall initialization time of the modem system 1 0 0. If the query task 2 1 0 finds that the channel characteristics of the target "match" the stored characteristics of the previously established channel ', then task 2 1 6 can be performed. During work 2 1 6, a shortened training program is performed. As detailed below, the modem system 100 will balance the known characteristics of the current channel so that the modem device can be trained immediately. For example, 'Although the specific timing stages of digital impairments (for example, captured bit signaling) may be unknown, the pattern of digital impairments will be the same for repeated connections. Therefore, in the case of a V · 90 modem system, it is not necessary to completely perform a lengthy digital impairment learning program. In addition, there is no need to perform the initial training of the equalizer and the echo canceller, and the initial determination of the PC codec transmission level and data rate. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 2 8 can be performed to enable the modem system 100 to operate at the initial data rate. It should be understood that portions of training related to job 2 1 6 may be performed at the initial data rate associated with job 2 1 8. By recalling the initialization parameters related to the previously stored channels, the modem system 100 can operate quickly at the initial data rate. During work 2 18, the modem system 100 can perform the final training of equalizers and echo cancellers, exchange modulation parameters, and exchange constellation signal points for the full-rate data mode period P 1. According to the present invention, PP 2 P data may be transmitted during work 2 1 8 in conjunction with one or more final training sequences. For example, -22- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 499809 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of invention (2) pp P data It can be related to login authentication information such as CHAP or PAP. Considering the data transfer during work 2 18, this part of the quick start processing 2000 can be regarded as the first data mode or data phase one. After work 2 18, fast start processing 200 will cause the modem system 100 to operate at the final data rate (work 2 2 0). In the case of this embodiment, processing this part of 200 can be regarded as the second data mode or data phase two. The transition between the initial and final data rates preferably occurs seamlessly; the modem system 1000 uses appropriate signal timing or synchronization techniques to enable this data rate conversion. During the full data mode, the modem system 100 utilizes the constellation of signal points exchanged during operation 2-18. Once the modem system enters the last data mode, the quick start process ends. Figure 3 is a block diagram illustrating a modem system 300 configured in accordance with the present invention. The modem system 300 is preferably configured to perform the fast start process 2000 and other processes described herein. For example, the modem system 3 0 0 described herein is a system of 56 k b ps or V. 90 (or a system that is actually similar to the V 9 0 system). However, it should be understood that the particular implementation shown in Fig. 3 is not intended to limit the invention in any way. Generally speaking, the modem system 300 includes a first modem such as the modem 300 and a second modem such as the modem 300. In the case of this description, modem 3 2 is considered a server modem, and modem 3 4 is considered a customer modem (see Figure 1). It should be understood that the modems 3 0 2 and 3 0 4 can be similarly configured so that they can both operate I 1 · --f ^-I--II ----- l · ------ I--I (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -23- 499809 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs制 A7 B7 _ V. Description of the invention (21). Modems 3 0 2 and 3 0 4 are usually configured according to conventional principles for telecommunications such as the public telephone network (PSTN) 3 0 6 via at least one communication channel (for example, 'channels 3 0 8 and 3 1 0). Communication on the Internet. For the sake of explanation ', as described above in conjunction with FIG. 1, the modem 302 is digitally connected to the PSTN 306, and the modem 304 is connected to the PSTN via a central office (not shown) and an analog local loop. For the sake of brevity, Figure 3 does not show the different encoders, decoders, and other functional elements typically found in actual modem systems. The modem 3 0 2 may include a processor element 3 1 2, and the modem 3 0 4 may include a processor element 3 1 4. In addition to the specific operations described herein, the processors 3 1 2 and 3 1 4 are suitably configured to perform different tasks related to the operation of the computer system 3 0 0. In fact, when it is necessary to support its functionality, the modem system 300 can incorporate any number of processors, control elements, and memory elements. These processors, controls, and memory elements may interact with other functional elements of the modems 302 and 304 as appropriate to access and manipulate data or monitor and regulate the operation of the data system 300. The processor 3 1 2 can be related to the quick connection confirmation routine shown in the function block 3 2 2. During the query 2 0 4, the quick connection confirmation routine 3 2 2 can be used (see Figure 2). The processor 3 1 2 is also operationally related to some training routines 3 2 4. Training routines 3 2 4 can be used for initial and / or final training of the modem system 300. As mentioned above, training routines 3 2 4 are used during work 2 1 6. Processor This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 24- II] — — — — — —-III l · III ^ · 1111111! (Please read the note on the back first? Matters (Fill in this page again) 499809 Printed A7 by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs --...... _B7_ V. Description of the invention (22) 3 1 2 It can also be used in conjunction with dial-up identification design 3 2 6 operation. Forensic design 3 2 6 can be information exchange based on PAP or CHAP. The C H A P / P A P function can be implemented staggered (or added) with one or more software maintained by a server corresponding to the modem 3 02. These illustrated operations are not intended to limit the capabilities of the processing elements 3 1 2, which are preferably configured to support any number of addition operations. The modem 3 0 2 includes a transmitter 3 1 6 which is used to transmit coded symbols according to conventional data transmission techniques. These symbols can represent the data, training sequences, synchronization signals, control signals, information exchange sequences, and any appropriate communication signals used by the modem system 300. The modem 3 0 2 also includes a receiver 3 1 8 which is configured according to any number of conventional modem technologies. The receiver 3 1 8 is configured to receive communication signals from the modem 3 0 4; these signals may include encoded information bits, control signals, information exchange sequences, training sequences, and so on. The receiver 3 1 8 includes or is functionally related to the equalizer structure 3 1 7 and the echo canceller structure 3 1 9. The configuration and operation of the equalizer structure 3 1 7 and the echo canceller structure 3 1 9 will be consistent with any number of conventional techniques such as adaptive filtering deduction. The modem 300 is preferably configured to generate, process, and transmit different data and signals related to the operation of the modem system 300. For the sake of explanation, FIG. 3 shows some blocks related to the different operating characteristics of the modem system 300; these operating characteristics have specific data sequences, control signals, etc. associated with them. Although the actual system can process and transmit any amount of additional or other information, the special embodiments described here will be compatible with at least this paper size in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

It ϋ n 1 n n n n 1 I n I— n ϋ^-r«»JI n ϋ I ϋ ^ n I I (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(23 ) 下述型式的資料協力操作:轉換序列3 2 8、回答訊號點 序列3 3 0、鑑識資訊3 3 2、快速連接識別器3 3 4、 訓練資訊3 3 6、及使用者資料3 3 8。將於下詳述此資 料、及數據機系統3 0 0之資料處理。 數據機3 0 2也包含支援其操作所需之適當數量的記 憶體3 3 0。記憶體元件3 2 0可爲隨機存取記憶體、唯 讀記憶體、或其組合。配合一或更多與本發明相關之處理 ’記憶體元件3 2 0可配置成儲存數據機系統3 0 0所使 用的資訊。舉例而言,記憶體元件3 2 0可配置成儲存適 當的回答訊號點序列3 3 8。記憶體3 2 0可儲存特定的 訊號點、傳送位準、用以格式化用於傳送的序列之樣式、 等等。在較佳實施例中,回答訊號點序列3 3 8會對應序 列3 3 0 (上述)。記憶體元件3 2 0也可配置成儲存一 些與接收器3 1 8的訓練相關之參數。以方塊3 4 0顯示 之這些接收器參數與等化器結構317及/或回音消除器 結構3 1 9的初始化相關連。實際上,記憶體元件3 2 0 儲存與類比及/或數位特性相關之資訊,舉例而言,這些 資訊可爲等化器結構3 1 7和回音消除器結構3 1 9的濾 波器分接係數、以及傳送編解碼位準預估。 根據本發明的較佳實施例,記憶體元件3 2 0也能夠 儲存先前建立的頻道(以先前頻道方塊3 4 2顯示)一些 參數、屬性、及/或特性。先前頻道參數3 4 2可在通訊 活動期間之任何適當時間儲存或是在時段期間週期地更新 。事實上,數據機3 0 2及數據機3 0 4均可配置成節省 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -26- I---Γ -----— II -----^— I 訂----— II — (請先閲讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(24 ) 目前的頻道參數以預先考慮與目前的通訊活動相關之暫時 中斷、延遲、或斷線(不論此中斷、延遲、或斷線是有意 或無意的)。如同下述之詳述般,爲了回應數據機資料傳 送模式中的暫時中斷或暫停,數據機3 0 2可以處於「等 待」直至通訊活動被再度初始化爲止。此時,數據機 3 0 2及3 0 4可以接取儲存的頻道參數而非執行冗長的 再訓練程序。 數據機3 0 4包含接收器3 5 0,其與等化器結構 3 5 2及回音消除器結構3 5 4操作上是相關的。接收器 3 5 0配置成從數據機3 0 2接收通訊訊號。數據機 3 0 4也包含發射機,用以傳送通訊訊號至數據機3 0 2 。數據機3 0 4的這些元件可類似於數據機3 0 2的對應 元件。因此,爲了簡明起見,在此數據機3 0 4的說明中 ,將不會重覆數據機3 0 2及3 0 4共同的特性及功能之 說明。 處理器3 1 4操作上可與快速連接確認常式3 5 8、 一或更多訓練常式3 6 0、及撥接鑑別設計3 6 2相關連 。這些處理功能類似於配合處理器3 1 2之上述對應功能 。除了這些特性之外,處理器3 1 4尙可在操作上與數位 損傷學習常式3 6 4相關連。數位損傷學習常式3 6 4可 以與傳統的V . 9 0數據機所執行之數位損傷學習程序並 容。常式3 6 4可用於促使數據機3 0 4能夠分析數據機 3 0 2傳送的數位損傷學習序列及能夠決定出現在通訊頻 道中的數位損傷型式及與此數位損傷有關之任何時序階段 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -27- II.--- ----------l·---^--------- (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 499809 A7 --------- B7 ____ 五、發明說明(25 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 。常式3 6 4可以與記憶體元件3 6 6相互作用,以致於 數據機3 0 4能儲存與給定的通訊頻道相關的數位損傷輪 廓。常式3 6 4可使數據機3 0 4能夠選取適當的訊號點 ’適當的訊號點係用以標明或顯著顯示出現在頻道中的被 奪取位元發訊。舉例而言,假使數據機3 〇 4判定網路強 制被奪取的位元(典型上爲符號的最低有效位元)成爲零 ’然後,選取具有最低有效位元爲1之訊號點,以致於可 輕易地偵測被奪取的位元發訊階段。 處理器3 1 4也可配置成執行頻道比較常式3 6 8, 比較常式3 6 8可在上述配合圖2說明之工作2 1 0期間 執行。頻道比較常式3 6 8較佳地決定目前的通訊頻道之 特性是否類似於儲存之先前建立的通訊頻道相關之特性。 在此說明的情形中,目前頻道係先前建立的頻道之重覆連 接,一些儲存的特性可以常駐於記憶體元件3 6 6中。將 於下詳述常式368。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 關於處理器3 1 2,此處所揭示之操作並非要限定處 理元件3 1 4的應用性,處理元件3 1 4係較佳地配置成 支援任何數目的增加操作。 如同數據機3 0 2般,數據機3 0 4會配置成產生、 處理、及傳送與數據機系統3 0 0的操作相關之不同資料 及訊號。可由任何數目之微處理器控制的元件適當地儲存 、格式化、及產生此資料、訊號、及序列。雖然實際的系 統可處理及傳送任何數量的增加或其它資料’但是發射機 區3 5 6係顯示配合下述型式的資料:快速連接識別器 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) :28^ 一 一 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明(26 ) 3 7 〇、轉換序列訊號點識別器3 7 2、訓練資訊3 7 4 、鑑識資訊3 7 6、及使用者資料3 7 8。將於下詳述此 資料、及數據機系統3 0 0的資料處理。 如上所述,數據機3 0 4包含支援其操作所需之適當 數量的記憶體3 6 6。記憶體元件3 6 6類似於記憶體元 件3 2 〇。在較佳實施例中,記憶體元件3 6 6配置成儲 存回答訊號點序列3 8 0,回答訊號點序列3 8 0係與數 據機3 〇 2所使用的對應回答訊號點序列3 3 8相關。在 本實施例中,在二數據機3 0 2及3 0 4中會預先決定及 知道相同的回答訊號點序列。記憶體元件3 6 6也會儲存 先前建立的頻道(以先前頻道方塊3 8 2表示)之一些參 數、屬性、及/或特性。可在通訊活動期間任何適當時間 儲存或在時段期間週期地更新先前頻道參數3 8 2。類似 於記憶體元件3 2 0,記憶體元件3 6 6也可配置成儲存 與接收器3 5 0的訓練相關之一些參數3 8 4。這些儲存 的接收器參數3 8 4可由數據機3 0 4較佳地接取以有效 地減少傳統V · 9 0數據機系統·典型上遭遇到的啓動遲 緩。 本發明的一些特性有助於減少V · 9 0數據機啓動及 /或重新連線次數,舉例而言,免除或縮短V · 8 b i s 程序、免除或縮短初始訓練程序、及在初始化處理中登入 的鑑識資料之較早交換(而非一直等待直到取得全資料速 率爲止)。在一實施例中,當數據機系統處於與中等資料 速率相關的初始訓練模式時’會交換登入鑑識資料。本發 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)-29 _ 1 ^ I β" I 一-口** I n / n I I 一 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(27 ) 明的這些(及其它)特點中之任一特點可在數據機3 〇 〇 中實施。 圖4係流程圖,顯示由二數據機裝置執行之快速啓動 處理4 0 0的部份,圖5係對應於二數據機裝置所執行的 快速啓動處理之時序圖5 0 0。時序圖5 0 0包含通常用 於V.8、 V.8bis、 V.34、 V.90、及其它 資料通訊協定的情形中之字頭及縮寫。此處使用此術語係 要說明一實際實施例的情形中本發明之觀念。但是,本發 明可用於任何適當的情形中,且圖5中所示的二數據機裝 置之間特定的訊號、序列數目、序列時序、資料速率、及 交互作用並非要限定發明之範圍。 以標示相關於諸如A P C Μ之客戶數據機及諸如 D P C Μ之伺服器數據機的工作之方式,說明快速啓動處 理400。同樣地,時序圖500顯示APCM及 D P C Μ傳送的一般訊號序列。在圖5中,二主要序列之 間的箭頭代表A P C Μ與D P C Μ之間的交互作用或回應 〇 快速啓動處理4 0 0開始於工作4 0 2 ’其造成 A P C Μ撥接與D P C Μ相關的電話號碼。如上所述,將 於地方迴路1 1 2、中央局1 1 〇、及數位電話網路 108上建立通話(參考圖1)。爲回應初始響鈴音’ D P C Μ會被置於連線狀態(工作4 0 4 )’亦即, DP CM會回答通話。當然,AP CM及DP CM可以配 置成根據傳統的電話協定產生、回答、及處理通話。在工 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) _ 30 - „^,1 一 一OJI n .^1 ϋ I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 Α7 __ Β7 五、發明說明(28 ) 作4 〇 4之後,可執行工作4 0 6以初始化諸如V · 8或 v · 8 b i s之能力交換協定。在此處所述的實施例中’ 能力請求訊號(在圖5中由C R e代表)可於工作4 0 6 期間被傳送。C R e訊號可用以通知A P C Μ,D P C Μ 會支援快速連接程序。C R e訊號可爲傳統V · 8 b i s 發訊音的修改版本,舉例而言,V · 8 b i s音可爲調幅 。或者,與發訊音相關的頻率會以週期方式顫動或是低位 準寬頻訊號可加至發訊音。以此方式’舊有的數據機系統 會將CRe訊號當作一般V · 8b i s CRe訊號。 爲回應與目前的通訊頻道相關之通話的建立, A P C Μ可執行工作4 0 8以適當地傳送快速連接識別器 (Q C )給D P C Μ。在此處所述之實際的實施例中’會 促成快速連接識別器的傳送以回應A P C Μ對C R e訊號 的偵測。Q C訊號較佳地設計成舊有的數據機及不支援快 速連接協定之數據機不會受Q C訊號不利影響,亦即’ Q C訊號應被不並容的裝置忽略。(假使A P C Μ未支援 此處所述之快速連接技術,則如同參考圖2之上述說明般 ,將不會產生Q C訊號且啓動將以傳統方式進行)。在較 佳實施例中,Q C訊號也會載有訊號點識別器,訊號點識 別器係辨別轉換序列(在圖5中以Q T S及Q T S \表示 )中由D P C Μ所使用之訊號點,其中訊號點係用以顯著 標明、顯示、或淸楚顯示出現在通訊頻道中的數位損傷。 因此,Q C訊號序列會執行雙重功能。 假設D P C Μ也支援快速連接方法,則其較佳地執行 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) ΙΙ1ΙΓ --------— — — ^---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 -- B7 五、發明說明(29 ) 工作4 1 〇以回應Q C訊號的接收。配合工作4 1 0, D P c Μ會傳送快速連接確認(在圖5中由Q C A訊號代 表)。如同參考圖2之上述所述般,假使D P C Μ未確認 Q C訊號,或者假使a P C Μ不知何以未收到Q C Α訊號 時’則數據機系統將進行傳統的啓動程序。如同關於數據 機系統3 0 0之上述所述般(參考圖3 ),可由個別數據 機的個別部份執行Q C及Q C A的格式.、規劃、及處理。 假使D P C Μ及A P C Μ均支援快速連接技術時,則 可視特定的應用而免除、修改、或縮短任何數目的初始化 常式。舉例而言,在V · 9 0並容的數據機系統之情形中 ,Q C訊號的傳送固有地標示A P C Μ係符合V · 9 0。 類似地,Q C Α訊號的傳送可固有地標示D P C Μ也是符 合V . 9 0。結果,數據機系統可免除諸如V · 8及/或 V · 8 b i s等一般能力交換協定之部份或全部。此特性 本身可以減少啓動遲緩5秒(對典型的連接而言)。 應瞭解,當D P C Μ初始對A P C Μ之通話時,與工 作4 0 2至工作4 1 0有關的上述快速連接識別及確認設 計可以等效地應用。當爲了回應來自A P C Μ的初始通話 或請求,DPCM呼叫APCM建立通訊頻道時,可能產 生此情形。在此情形中,A P C Μ將傳送C R e訊號, D P C Μ將傳送Q C訊號,且A P C Μ將傳送Q C A訊號 。與A P CM初始通話之上述說明不同,A P CM會將適 當地識別轉換序列訊號點之增加訊號或序列傳送給 D P C Μ (並非將訊號點嵌入於C R e或Q C A序列中) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -32 *-It ϋ n 1 nnnn 1 I n I— n ϋ ^ -r «» JI n ϋ I ϋ ^ n II (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 499809 Printed by the Employees ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (23) The following types of data work together: conversion sequence 3 2 8, response signal point sequence 3 3 0, forensic information 3 3 2, quick connection identifier 3 3 4, training information 3 3 6 , And user information 3 3 8. This data and the data processing of the modem system 300 will be detailed below. The modem 3 0 2 also contains the appropriate number of memory 3 3 0 needed to support its operation. The memory element 3 2 0 may be a random access memory, a read-only memory, or a combination thereof. In cooperation with one or more processes related to the present invention, the 'memory element 3 2 0' may be configured to store information used by the modem system 3 0 0 '. For example, the memory element 3 2 0 may be configured to store a proper response signal point sequence 3 3 8. Memory 3 2 0 can store specific signal points, transmission levels, patterns used to format sequences used for transmission, and so on. In the preferred embodiment, the response signal point sequence 3 3 8 corresponds to the sequence 3 3 0 (described above). The memory element 3 2 0 can also be configured to store some parameters related to the training of the receiver 3 1 8. These receiver parameters shown in block 3 4 0 are associated with the initialization of the equalizer structure 317 and / or the echo canceller structure 3 1 9. In fact, the memory element 3 2 0 stores information related to analog and / or digital characteristics. For example, this information may be filter tap coefficients of the equalizer structure 3 1 7 and the echo canceller structure 3 1 9 , And transmit codec level estimates. According to a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the memory element 3 2 0 can also store some parameters, attributes, and / or characteristics of a previously created channel (shown in the previous channel box 3 4 2). The previous channel parameters 3 4 2 can be stored at any appropriate time during the communication event or periodically updated during the time period. In fact, both the modem 3 0 2 and the modem 3 4 can be configured to save the paper. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -26- I --- Γ ---- -— II ----- ^ — I Order ----— II — (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Employees ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 B7 V. Invention Note (24) The current channel parameters take into account temporary interruptions, delays, or disconnections related to the current communication activity in advance (regardless of whether the interruptions, delays, or disconnections are intentional or unintentional). As detailed below, in response to a temporary interruption or pause in the modem's data transfer mode, the modem 302 can be "waited" until the communication activity is re-initialized. At this time, modems 302 and 304 can access the stored channel parameters instead of performing lengthy retraining procedures. The modem 3 0 4 includes a receiver 3 5 0 which is operationally related to the equalizer structure 3 5 2 and the echo canceller structure 3 5 4. The receiver 3 50 is configured to receive a communication signal from the modem 3 2. The modem 300 also includes a transmitter for transmitting communication signals to the modem 300. These elements of the modem 300 may be similar to the corresponding elements of the modem 300. Therefore, for the sake of brevity, the description of the modems 304 will not repeat the common features and functions of the modems 302 and 300. The processor 3 1 4 can be operatively associated with the quick connection confirmation routine 3 5 8, one or more training routines 3 60, and the dial-up authentication design 3 6 2. These processing functions are similar to the corresponding functions described above in conjunction with the processor 3 1 2. In addition to these characteristics, the processor 3 1 4 尙 may be operatively related to the digital impairment learning routine 3 6 4. The digital impairment learning routine 3 6.4 can be compatible with the digital impairment learning procedures performed by conventional V.90 modems. The routine 3 6 4 can be used to enable the modem 3 0 4 to analyze the digital impairment learning sequence transmitted by the modem 3 2 and determine the type of digital impairment appearing in the communication channel and any timing stages related to the digital impairment. Standards are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) -27- II .--- ---------- l · --- ^ --------- (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 499809 A7 --------- B7 ____ V. Invention Description (25) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page). The formula 3 6 4 can interact with the memory element 3 6 6 so that the modem 3 0 4 can store the digital damage profile associated with a given communication channel. The routine 3 6 4 enables the modem 3 0 4 to select the appropriate signal point. The appropriate signal point is used to mark or prominently display the captured bits appearing in the channel to transmit. For example, if the modem 300 determines that the bit (typically the least significant bit of the symbol) that is forced to be captured by the network becomes zero, then it selects the signal point with the least significant bit of 1, so that it can be Easily detect the captured bit transmission phase. The processor 3 1 4 may also be configured to execute the channel comparison routine 3 6 8, and the comparison routine 3 6 8 may be performed during the work 2 10 described above with reference to FIG. 2. The channel comparison routine 3 6 8 preferably determines whether the characteristics of the current communication channel are similar to those of the previously established communication channel. In the case described here, the current channel is a repeated connection of a previously established channel, and some stored characteristics may reside in the memory element 3 6 6. Formula 368 will be described in detail below. The Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed on the processor 3 1 2. The operations disclosed here are not intended to limit the applicability of the processing element 3 1 4. The processing element 3 1 4 is preferably configured to support any number of increases operating. Like the modem 300, the modem 300 is configured to generate, process, and transmit different data and signals related to the operation of the modem system 300. The data, signals, and sequences can be appropriately stored, formatted, and generated by any number of microprocessor-controlled components. Although the actual system can process and transmit any amount of additional or other data ', the transmitter area 3 5 6 series displays the following types of data: Quick Connect Identifier This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm): 28 ^ Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (26) 3 7 〇 Conversion point signal point identifier 3 7 2. Training information 3 7 4 , Forensic information 3 7 6, and user information 3 7 8. This data and the data processing of the modem system 300 will be detailed below. As mentioned above, the modem 3 0 4 contains the appropriate amount of memory 3 6 6 required to support its operation. The memory element 3 6 6 is similar to the memory element 3 2 0. In the preferred embodiment, the memory element 3 6 6 is configured to store the response signal point sequence 3 8 0, which is related to the corresponding response signal point sequence 3 3 8 used by the modem 3 02. . In this embodiment, the two modems 302 and 304 determine and know the same sequence of response signal points in advance. The memory element 3 6 6 also stores some parameters, attributes, and / or characteristics of the previously created channel (indicated by the previous channel box 3 8 2). Previous channel parameters 3 8 2 can be stored at any appropriate time during the communication event or periodically updated during the time period. Similar to the memory element 3 2 0, the memory element 3 6 6 can also be configured to store some parameters 3 8 4 related to the training of the receiver 3 5 0. These stored receiver parameters 3 8 4 are preferably accessed by the modem 3 0 4 to effectively reduce the start-up delay typically encountered with conventional V · 90 modem systems. Some features of the present invention help to reduce the number of V · 90 modem startup and / or reconnection times. For example, the V · 8 bis program is eliminated or shortened, the initial training program is eliminated or shortened, and login during the initialization process Exchange of forensic data earlier (rather than waiting until the full data rate is obtained). In one embodiment, when the modem system is in an initial training mode related to a medium data rate, the login identification data is exchanged. The paper size of this issue applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -29 _ 1 ^ I β " I 一-口 ** I n / n II First (Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) 499809 Printed by A7 B7, Employee Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Any of these (and other) features described in the invention description (27) can be implemented in the modem 300. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a part of the fast start processing 400 performed by the two modem devices, and FIG. 5 is a timing chart 500 corresponding to the fast start processing performed by the two modem devices. The timing diagram 5 0 0 contains the prefixes and abbreviations commonly used in the case of V.8, V.8bis, V.34, V.90, and other data communication protocols. This term is used here to illustrate the concept of the invention in the context of a practical embodiment. However, the present invention can be used in any suitable situation, and the specific signals, number of sequences, sequence timing, data rate, and interaction between the two modem devices shown in FIG. 5 are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. The quick start process 400 is illustrated in terms of the manner in which it is associated with customer modems such as APCM and server modems such as DPCM. Similarly, timing diagram 500 shows a general signal sequence transmitted by APCM and DPCM. In Figure 5, the arrows between the two main sequences represent the interaction or response between APC Μ and DPC Μ. Quick start processing 4 0 starts at work 4 2 'which causes APC Μ dial-up to be related to DPC Μ telephone number. As described above, a call will be established on the local loop 1 12, the central office 1 10, and the digital telephone network 108 (refer to FIG. 1). In response to the initial ring tone, “DPCM will be placed in the connected state (working 4 0 4)”, that is, the DP CM will answer the call. Of course, the AP CM and DP CM can be configured to generate, answer, and handle calls according to traditional telephone protocols. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) _ 30-„^, 1 OJI n. ^ 1 ϋ II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau 499809 Α7 __ Β7 V. Description of the invention (28) After 4 0, work 4 0 6 can be performed to initialize a capacity exchange agreement such as V 8 or v 8 bis. Here In the embodiment described here, the capability request signal (represented by CR e in FIG. 5) can be transmitted during work 406. The CR e signal can be used to notify APC Μ, DPC Μ will support the fast connection procedure. CR e The signal can be a modified version of the traditional V · 8 bis tone. For example, the V · 8 bis tone can be AM. Alternatively, the frequency associated with the tone can be pulsated in a periodic manner or a low-level quasi-broadband signal can be added. To send a tone. In this way, the "old modem system" will treat the CRe signal as a normal V · 8b is CRe signal. In response to the establishment of a call related to the current communication channel, APC Μ can perform work 4 0 8 For proper transmission of fast connection identification (QC) to DPC M. In the actual embodiment described here, 'will facilitate the transmission of the fast connection identifier in response to the detection of CR e signal by APC M. The QC signal is preferably designed as an old one Modems and modems that do not support the Quick Connect Protocol will not be adversely affected by the QC signal, that is, the QC signal should be ignored by incompatible devices. (If APC M does not support the Quick Connect technology described here, it is as if With reference to the above description with reference to Figure 2, QC signals will not be generated and activation will be performed in a conventional manner. In a preferred embodiment, the QC signal will also carry a signal point identifier, which identifies the conversion sequence ( The signal points used by DPC M in Figure 5 are represented by QTS and QTS (), where the signal points are used to prominently indicate, display, or clearly show the digital impairments appearing in the communication channel. Therefore, the QC signal sequence It will perform dual functions. Assuming that DPC Μ also supports the fast connection method, it is better to implement this paper standard applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 χ 297 mm) ΙΙ1ΙΓ -----------^ --------- Line · (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7-B7 V. Description of Invention (29) Work 4 1 〇 in response to the reception of the QC signal. In cooperation with 4 10, DP c M will send a fast connection confirmation (represented by the QCA signal in Figure 5). As described above with reference to FIG. 2, if the DPCCM does not confirm the QC signal, or if the aPCCM does not know why the QCA signal is not received, then the modem system will perform the conventional startup procedure. As described above with reference to the modem system 300 (refer to FIG. 3), the format, planning, and processing of Q C and Q C A can be performed by individual parts of individual modems. If both DPCM and APCM support fast connection technology, depending on the specific application, any number of initialization routines can be eliminated, modified, or shortened. For example, in the case of a V · 90 compatible modem system, the transmission of the Q C signal inherently indicates that AP MC is in compliance with V · 90. Similarly, the transmission of the Q CA signal can inherently indicate that DPCM is also V.90. As a result, the modem system can be exempt from some or all of the general capability exchange agreements such as V · 8 and / or V · 8 bis. This feature itself can reduce startup lag by 5 seconds (for a typical connection). It should be understood that when DPCCM initially talks to APCM, the above-mentioned quick connection identification and confirmation design related to work 402 to work 4 10 can be equivalently applied. This situation may occur when DPCM calls APCM to establish a communication channel in response to an initial call or request from APCM. In this case, APCM will send a CRe signal, DPPC will send a QC signal, and APCM will send a QC A signal. Different from the above description of the initial call of AP CM, AP CM will transmit the increase signal or sequence that appropriately identifies the conversion sequence signal point to DPC Μ (not embed the signal point in CR e or QCA sequence) Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) -32 *-

I n 一-<»4 I I I n n n 1 I 1· 1 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(30 ) 〇 在工作4 1 0之後,DP CM會執行工作4 1 2以取 得用於轉換(或同步)序列之訊號點。如上所述般,Q C 訊號較佳地載有識別訊號點之資訊,這些訊號點係可使 A P C Μ輕易偵測到奪取位元發訊存在。如同關於數位損 傷學習程序3 6 4之上述所述般(參考圖3),可由 A P C Μ執行特定訊號點的決定。此決定可根據相同頻道 上與先前連接相關的數位損傷之過去的分析。在A P C Μ 接收Q C訊號之後,工作4 1 2可由處理器3 1 2執行。 爲回應工作4 1 2,可執行工作4 1 4以致於適當的 轉換序列會由D P C Μ傳送。在舉例說明的實施例中,轉 換序列包含工作4 1 2中取得的訊號點之正及負値。因此 ,D P C Μ可利用A P C Μ所選取的訊號點及適當的正負 號(可預先決定)以產生轉換序列。轉換序列配置成及格 式化成A P C Μ在偵測傳送序列時能使其本身與D P C Μ 傳送的後續訊號或序列同步。以此方式,A P C Μ接收器 能從轉換序列取得其時序。轉換序列可具有任何預定長度 及具有任何預定正負號樣序。舉例而言,在圖5中所示的 實施例中,轉換序列會由快速時序序列(Q T S )及 Q T S /訊號代表,其中Q T S代表特定訊號點序列且 Q T S \係具有相反的正負號之相同序列。在圖5中, Q T S序列會重覆8 1 0個符號,而Q T S \序列會重覆 3 0個符號。 根據本發明的一實際實施例,Q T S序列會被格式化 I!--r ----------— l·---^------I! (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 33- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(31 ) ’以致於Q T S根序列的時間及與網路連接相關之被奪取 的位元發訊(R B S )之時間不具有共同的分母(一以外 )。舉例而言,一適當的Q T S根序列係0、+ A、一 A 、+ A、一 A (其中A代表顯著標示RBS存在之訊號點 。因此,對於圖5中所示之實施例而言,具有五之週期的 此QTS根序列會重覆1 6 2次,而QTS\序列包含具 有相反的正負號之六個重覆的根Q T S序列。 對上述實施例而言,其中RB S週期會被假設爲六’ 收到的轉換序列會接受3 0點的離散傅立葉轉換(D F T )以取得D P C Μ的時序階段。此外,在與D F T結果相 關的某些離散頻率處,透露R B S的存在。以此方式,可 從收到的轉換序列中選取時序及R B S資訊。此外,從 R B S資訊可獨立地取得時序階段資訊。 D P C Μ較佳地配置成在工作4 1 6期間傳送特定的 訊號點序列。如同熟悉數據機協定者所瞭解般,訊號點序 列可被視爲修改的回答音。在圖5中,此訊號點序列會由 A N S p c m訊號所代表。如圖3所示,預定的 A N S p c m序列3 3 8可儲存於記憶體元件3 2 0中以 由發射機區3 1 6傳送。在實際的實施例中,D P C Μ會 在轉換序列之後傳送A N S p c m訊號。對於使A P C Μ 一旦偵測到轉換序列即能夠預料訊號點序列而言,此點是 需要的。換言之’ A P C Μ對轉換序列之偵測意指訊號點 序列將跟隨在後。 在較佳實施例中’ A N S p c m訊號包括脈沖碼調變 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 1!——^-------— -----訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 34- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(32 ) 訊號點的序列或與脈沖碼調變訊號點相關之訊號點的序列 。舉例而言,A N S p c m訊號可以格式化成微法則( mu-law )或A法則(A-law )碼字序列或是通用碼字(U 碼)序列。A P C Μ及D P C Μ較佳地配置成 A N S p c m訊號會在快速啓動處理4 0 0的初始化之前 被預先決定及預知。在另一實施例中,不同的 A N S p c m訊號的數目可以適當地儲存於查詢表中,或 者,A N S p c m訊號可由數據機裝置之一設計並於工作 4 1 6之前以適當方式傳送至另一數據機裝置。舉例而言 ,A N S p c m訊號可被設計成藉由分析所收到的 A N S p c m訊號而由A P C Μ輕易地偵測到R B S的存 在。在此實施例中,對於轉換序列(Q T S及Q T S \ ) 而言,可能不需要識別或顯著標示R B S。 在V · 8的情形中,係以調幅2 1 Ο Ο Η ζ音產生回 答音。相反地,本發明利用A N S p c m訊號以使用脈沖 碼調變訊號點而以數位方式產生音調(舉例而言, 2100Hz的音調)。換言之,ANSpcm訊號係類 比訊號的數位表現。以習知的脈沖碼調變點較佳地構成 AN S p cm訊號,以致於aNS p cm訊號可用於單純 的回答音以外的其它目的。在較佳實施例中, AM S p c❿訊號包含很多與特定電話網路相關之可變脈 沖碼調變點。需要此A N S p c m訊號的此態樣,以致於 A M S p c m計號可用於決定或識別目前的通訊頻道之特 性’特別是數位塡襯。使用大量的可能碼字會確保 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 x 297公釐) -35- —ί--Γ ------------r---訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 Α7 I—丨"丨· Β7 五、發明說明(33 ) A N S p c m §只號將偵測可能將二輸入位準合倂成一輸出 位準之數位塡襯。A N S p c m訊號也配置成提供適用於 建立網路回音消除器及使網路回音抑制器不致動之音調。 假使使用查詢表以界定A N S p c m訊號時,在想要 或要求多個傳送位準的情形中,實際的實施是有困難的。 舉例而言,ITU-T建議V·90允許DPCM指定 3 2個不同的傳送位準。儲存用於每一傳送位準之分別表 ’可能因而導致過多的記憶體需求。因此,在另一實施例 中,可以界定程序以將多個與一傳送位準有關之碼字映射 至對應的多個與其它傳送位準相關之碼字。舉例而言,在 界定—0 · 5dBm〇位準的ANSpcm訊號之PCM 碼字表的情形中,程序係關於映射每一個別的P C Μ碼字 至其對應的P C Μ位準、根據所需的傳送位準縮小以將位 準標度、將所造成的位準量化回至最接近的P C Μ位準、 及轉換成對應的P C Μ碼字。因此,在D P C Μ發射機及 A P C Μ接收器中可使用相同的機制以構成對應的 A N S p c m訊號,因此,在每一側上產生相同的P C Μ 碼字序列。注意,根據本實施例,量化規則在處理量化中 的「平手」時應該要準確,「平手」亦即假使二P C Μ位 準與經過標度的位準等距。舉例而言,此規則意指在平手 的情形中,選取較接近零之P C Μ位準。 根據又另一實施例,界定AN S p c m訊號的整個方 法應根據產生代表A N S p c m訊號之P C Μ碼字序列之 預定演繹法。舉例而言,訊號可被界定成2 1 0 0 Η ζ爲 Γ ------------r---訂 ---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -36- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(34 ) 最強之音調集合,其中音調預先界定振幅及初始相位。然 後’再度使用平手的情形中之準確量化規則’根據最接近 的P C Μ位準以量化所造成的訊號。但是,此方法也將採 用正弦或餘弦函數、以及音調總合時會累積如少位元之準 確定義,以確保計算以兩端一致的方式進行,以致於 A N S p c m訊號可以被適當地偵測到。 如上所述,AP CM會預料ANS p cm訊號的傳送 。與通訊頻道相關之數位損傷及類比特性於A N S p c m 訊號從DP CM傳送至AP CM時會影響ANS p cm訊 號。工作4 1 8可由AP CM執行以取得與AN S p cm 訊號點序列相關之收到的序列。然後,A P C M可執行工 作4 2 0以比較收到的序列之一些屬性與先前建立的通訊 頻道相關之先前收到的序列之一些儲存的屬性。在說明的 實施例中,先前收到的序列係數位損傷學習(D I L )序 列,其係線探索序列。關於此點,工作4 2 0會決定目前 的頻道之特性是否類似於先前建立的頻道之對應特性。在 較佳實施例中,在工作4 2 0中比較的頻道特性與頻道中 的數位損傷相關。換言之,工作4 2 0會以儲存的數位損 傷頻道輪廓,確認目前的數位損傷頻道輪廓。以適當的 APCM處理器元件,執行工作420(參見圖3)。 在工作4 2 0期間,點/位準之任何可量測特性、整 個收到序列之任何可量測特性、及/或與點/位準相關之 任何可量測的訊號或量可由A P C Μ分析。舉例而言’包 含於收到序列中任何數目之個別點或位準可以與儲存於 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210><297公釐) _ 37 _ ί !磐____l·!丨訂_________線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 499809 A7 -----B7 五、發明說明(35 ) (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) A P c Μ之對應的點或位準相比較(儲存的點或位準可以 與先前的D I L程序關連)。假使收到的點/位準與儲存 的點/位準「相符」,或是假使收到的及儲存的點/位準 之間的差異係在某臨限値之値,則A P C Μ可假定目前的 頻道屬性與儲存的頻道屬性相符(參見圖2中的查詢工作 2 10)。 A P C Μ可執行程序4 2 1以適當地取得及儲存先前 對目前頻道建立的頻道之一些屬性或特性。如上所述,程 序4 2 1會促使A P C Μ儲存包含於收到的D I L序列中 之點/位準的特性。接著在工作4 2 0期間使用這些過去 的値。關於此點,舉例而言,爲回應與目前的連接相關之 後續的D I L程序,在工作4 2 0完成比較之後,程序 4 2 1會以新的D I L値更新舊的値。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 如同參考圖2所述,假使工作4 2 0決定頻道特性未 充份地匹配時,則數據機系統會重返至傳統的V · 9 0啓 動程序。圖5係顯示APCM落回至V·8協定及傳送傳 統的V · 8呼叫選單(C Μ )訊息給D P C Μ。接著,用 於AP CM之傳統V . 8啓動會延著序列5 0 2。爲回應 C Μ訊息,D P C Μ會產生傳統的V · 8結合選單(J Μ )訊息並根據傳統的V · 8初始化(以序列5 0 4標示) 進行。爲說明起見,快速啓動處理4 0 0會假定工作 4 2 0決定目前的通訊頻道類似於先前建立的通訊頻道。 假使A P C Μ以先前的頻道確認目前的頻道特性,則 其會觸發快速啓動常式以進一步減少與數據機系統相關的 -38- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 499809 Α7 ------ Β7 五、發明說明(36 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 初始化時間。或者,D P C Μ可以配置成觸發快速啓動常 式。因此’在數據機系統被初始地訓練期間,可以執行工 作4 2 2。(爲了簡明起見,工作4 2 2的部份及後續工 作的部份可由A P C Μ及D P C Μ執行;快速啓動處理 4 0 〇說明單一處理工作情形中此結合的功能)。工作 4 2 2會促使AP CM及DP CM初始化以回應一些與先 前建立的通訊頻道相關之儲存參數。如上所述,儲存的參 數與等化器、回音消除器、傳送功率位準、初始訊號點星 座、等等的初始化或訓練有關。工作4 2 2可配合程序 4 2 1操作,其較佳地用以取得及儲存與先前的連接相關 之初始化參數。關於此點,程序4 2 1可以適當地設計, 以便在重新協商處理之後,或是爲了回應與先前通訊活動 相關的任何條件或事件,於先前連接的一般資料模式期間 週期地儲存這些參數。程序4 2 1也可配置成不會不慎地 儲存錯誤設定或初始化參數。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在典型的V · 9 0連接的情形中,工作4 2 2與二點 訓練階段有關。使用先前的參數,數據機系統能夠跳過或 縮短傳統V · 9 0階段2探索及測距之程序及跳過或縮短 傳統V . 9 0階段3數位損傷學習及初始訓練程序。如圖 5所示,AP CM及DP CM均可在工作4 2 2期間傳送 訓練序列(以T R N 1訊號代表)。這些訓練訊號可用以 適當地調整等化器及回音消除器濾波器分接及便於數據機 系統的訓練。因此,能夠以足夠時間微調及訓練之有效率 方式,執行V · 9 0啓動的最耗時程序之一(A P C Μ等 -39- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 499809 A7 ___ B7 五、發明說明(37 ) 化器的訓練)。 (請先閲讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 除了發生於工作4 2 2期間之初始訓練之外,也會執 行工作4 2 4。在工作4 2 4期間,數據據系統會執行錯 誤校正及/或資料壓縮協定。在傳統的V · 9 0數據機系 統中,錯誤校正係依循V · 4 2建議,資料壓縮係依循 V · 42b i s建議。舉例而言,在與PPP連接相關之 一般V · 9 0操作模式中,在最後訓練之後及C H A P / PAP鑑識程序之前,執行V · 42及V · 42b i s程 序。由於CHAP/PAP程序較適於「無錯誤」頻道, 所以,在CPAH/PPP程序之前,執行V.42及 V · 4 2 b i s。與傳統的V · 9 0系統不同,工作 4 2 4會於V · 9 0啓動的階段3期間執行 V · 42b i s °V· 42b i s在啓動處理中向前移有 助於減少連接時間。在圖5中,X I D訊號代表傳統的 V · 4 2 X I D訊號之修正版。舉例而言,X I D訊號 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 可利用用於協商壓縮等等之X I D參數的子集合。也可配 合圖5中所示之不同修正訊號序列以執行V . 4 2 b i s 程序的部份。舉例而言,C P t訊號代表與一或更多 V · 4 2 b i s訊號結合的傳統V · 9 0 C P t訊號。 在較佳實施例中,執行V · 4 2 b i s程序以提供實 際的「無錯誤」頻道。在工作4 2 4之後,I n 一-< »4 III nnn 1 I 1 · 1 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 499809 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. Description of Invention (30) 〇 在After task 4 10, the DP CM performs task 4 1 2 to obtain the signal points for the conversion (or synchronization) sequence. As described above, the Q C signal preferably contains information identifying signal points, and these signal points enable APCM to easily detect the presence of the captured bit signal. As described above with reference to the digital damage learning program 3 64 (refer to FIG. 3), the decision of a specific signal point can be performed by APCM. This decision can be based on past analysis of digital impairments associated with previous connections on the same channel. After the AP C M receives the Q C signal, work 4 1 2 may be performed by the processor 3 1 2. In response to task 4 1 2, task 4 1 4 can be performed so that the appropriate conversion sequence will be transmitted by DPCM. In the illustrated embodiment, the conversion sequence includes the positive and negative values of the signal points obtained in job 4 12. Therefore, DPCM can use the signal points selected by APCM and the appropriate sign (can be determined in advance) to generate a conversion sequence. The conversion sequence is configured and formatted into A P C M, which can synchronize itself with subsequent signals or sequences transmitted by D P C M when detecting the transmission sequence. In this way, the APCM receiver can obtain its timing from the conversion sequence. The conversion sequence can have any predetermined length and have any predetermined sign sequence. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, the conversion sequence will be represented by a fast timing sequence (QTS) and a QTS / signal, where QTS represents a specific signal point sequence and QTS \ is the same sequence with opposite sign . In Fig. 5, the Q T S sequence will repeat 810 symbols, and the Q T S \ sequence will repeat 30 symbols. According to a practical embodiment of the present invention, the QTS sequence will be formatted I!-R ------------ l · --- ^ ------ I! (Please read the back first Note: Please fill in this page for matters.) This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). 33- Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 'As a result, the time of the QTS root sequence and the time of the captured bit signaling (RBS) associated with the network connection do not have a common denominator (other than one). For example, a suitable QTS root sequence is 0, + A, -A, + A, -A (where A represents a signal point that significantly indicates the presence of RBS. Therefore, for the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, This QTS root sequence with a period of five will be repeated 16 times, and the QTS \ sequence contains six repeated root QTS sequences with opposite signs. For the above embodiment, the RBS period will be Assume that the received conversion sequence will accept 30 points of discrete Fourier transform (DFT) to obtain the DPC M timing sequence. In addition, the existence of RBS is revealed at some discrete frequencies related to the DFT results. Method, the timing and RBS information can be selected from the received conversion sequence. In addition, the timing phase information can be obtained independently from the RBS information. The DPC M is preferably configured to transmit a specific signal point sequence during work 4 1 6. Those familiar with modem agreements understand that the signal point sequence can be regarded as a modified answer tone. In Figure 5, this signal point sequence will be represented by the ANS pcm signal. As shown in Figure 3, the predetermined ANS pcm sequence 3 3 8 can be stored It is transmitted in the memory element 3 2 0 by the transmitter area 3 16. In a practical embodiment, the DPC M will transmit the ANS pcm signal after the conversion sequence. It is expected that the APC M can detect the conversion sequence once it detects the conversion sequence. This point is required for the signal point sequence. In other words, the detection of the conversion sequence by APC M means that the signal point sequence will follow. In the preferred embodiment, the ANS pcm signal includes pulse code to modulate the paper size. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public love) 1! ^ --------- ----- order --------- line · (Please read first Note on the back? Please fill in this page for further information.) 34- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (32) Sequence of signal points or sequence of signal points related to pulse code modulation For example, the ANS pcm signal can be formatted as a micro-law (A-law) codeword sequence or a universal codeword (U-code) sequence. The APC M and DPC M are preferably configured as The ANS pcm signal will be pre-empted before the fast start process 4 0 0 initialization. Decide and predict in advance. In another embodiment, the number of different ANS pcm signals may be appropriately stored in a look-up table, or the ANS pcm signals may be designed by one of the modem devices and in an appropriate manner before work 4 1 6 Send to another modem device. For example, the ANS pcm signal can be designed to easily detect the presence of RBS by the APC M by analyzing the received ANS pcm signal. In this embodiment, for the conversion sequences (Q T S and Q T S \), R B S may not need to be identified or marked. In the case of V · 8, the response tone is generated with an amplitude modulation of 2 1 〇 〇 Η ζ tone. In contrast, the present invention utilizes the A N S p c m signal to digitally generate a tone using a pulse code to modulate the signal point (for example, a 2100 Hz tone). In other words, the ANSpcm signal is a digital representation of an analog signal. The AN S p cm signal is preferably constituted with a conventional pulse code modulation point, so that the aNS p cm signal can be used for purposes other than a simple answer tone. In the preferred embodiment, the AM Spc signal includes a number of variable pulse code modulation points associated with a particular telephone network. This aspect of the A N S p c m signal is required so that the A M S p c m number can be used to determine or identify the characteristics of the current communication channel ', especially the digital display. The use of a large number of possible codewords will ensure that this paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇x 297 mm) -35- —ί--Γ ------------ r- --Order --------- line (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Description of the Invention (33) ANS pcm § The number will detect a digital line that may combine two input levels into one output level. The A NS signal is also configured to provide a tone suitable for establishing a network echo canceller and deactivating the network echo suppressor. If a look-up table is used to define the A N S p cm signal, actual implementation is difficult in situations where multiple transmission levels are desired or required. For example, ITU-T Recommendation V · 90 allows DPCM to specify 32 different transmission levels. Storing separate tables for each transmission level may cause excessive memory requirements. Therefore, in another embodiment, a procedure may be defined to map a plurality of codewords related to one transmission level to a corresponding plurality of codewords related to other transmission levels. For example, in the case of defining a PCM codeword table of ANSpcm signals at -0.5 dBm 0 level, the program is about mapping each individual PC M codeword to its corresponding PC M level, according to the required The transmission level is reduced to quantify the level scale, quantize the resulting level back to the nearest PC M level, and convert it into a corresponding PC M codeword. Therefore, the same mechanism can be used in the DPCM transmitter and the APCM receiver to form the corresponding ANSPcm signal, so the same PCM codeword sequence is generated on each side. Note that according to this embodiment, the quantization rule should be accurate when processing the "tie" in quantization, that is, if the two PCM levels are equidistant from the scaled level. For example, this rule means that in the case of a tie, the PCM level closer to zero is chosen. According to yet another embodiment, the entire method of defining the AN Spcm signal should be based on a predetermined deduction method that generates a PCM codeword sequence representative of the ANSp signal. For example, the signal can be defined as 2 1 0 0 Η ζ is Γ ------------ r --- order --------- line (please read the back Note: Please fill in this page again.) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -36- Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 B7 5. Description of Invention (34) Strongest A set of tones in which the tones are pre-defined in amplitude and initial phase. Then, 'accurate quantization rule in the case of a tie again' is used to quantify the resulting signal based on the closest PCM level. However, this method will also use the sine or cosine function, and accumulate accurate definitions such as fewer bits when the pitch is combined to ensure that the calculation is performed in a consistent manner at both ends so that the ANS pcm signal can be properly detected . As mentioned above, AP CM expects the transmission of the ANS p cm signal. The digital impairments and analog characteristics associated with communication channels affect the ANS p cm signal when the A N S p cm signal is transmitted from the DP CM to the AP CM. Tasks 4 1 8 may be performed by the AP CM to obtain the received sequence related to the AN Sp cm signal point sequence. APCM may then perform work 420 to compare some of the attributes of the received sequence with some of the stored attributes of the previously received sequence associated with the previously established communication channel. In the illustrated embodiment, a previously received sequence coefficient bit impairment learning (D I L) sequence is tethered to the search sequence. In this regard, work 4 2 0 will determine whether the characteristics of the current channel are similar to those of the previously established channel. In the preferred embodiment, the channel characteristics compared in operation 420 are related to the digital impairments in the channel. In other words, working 4 2 0 will damage the channel profile with the stored digital and confirm the current digital damaged channel profile. With the appropriate APCM processor elements, work 420 is performed (see Figure 3). During work 4 2 0, any measurable characteristic of the point / level, any measurable characteristic of the entire received sequence, and / or any measurable signal or quantity related to the point / level can be determined by APC Μ analysis. For example, 'any number of individual points or levels included in the received sequence can be stored in this paper with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 > < 297 mm) _ 37 _!! _ ___ l ·! 丨 Order _________ line · (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 499809 A7 ----- B7 V. Description of the invention (35) (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling in this Page) AP c Μ corresponding point or level is compared (the stored point or level can be related to the previous DIL procedure). If the received points / levels are "consistent" with the stored points / levels, or if the difference between the received and stored points / levels is within a threshold, then APC M can assume The current channel attributes correspond to the stored channel attributes (see query work 2 10 in Figure 2). APCM may execute the procedure 421 to appropriately obtain and store some attributes or characteristics of the channel previously established for the current channel. As described above, the program 421 will cause APCM to store the characteristics of the points / levels contained in the received D I L sequence. These past encounters are then used during work 420. In this regard, for example, in response to a subsequent D I L procedure related to the current connection, after completing the comparison at work 4 2 0, the procedure 4 2 1 will update the old D 2 with the new D I L 2. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs As described with reference to Figure 2, if work 4 2 0 determines that the channel characteristics are not adequately matched, the modem system will return to the traditional V · 90 start-up procedure. Figure 5 shows the APCM falling back to the V · 8 protocol and transmitting the traditional V · 8 call menu (CM) message to the DPCM. Then, the traditional V.8 startup for AP CM will run the sequence 502. In response to the CM message, the DPCM generates a traditional V · 8 combined menu (JM) message and initializes it according to the traditional V · 8 (indicated by the sequence 504). For the sake of illustration, the quick start process 4 0 will assume work 4 2 0 to determine that the current communication channel is similar to the previously established communication channel. If APC M confirms the current channel characteristics with the previous channel, it will trigger a quick-start routine to further reduce the number of modem-related systems. -38- This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) (Centi) 499809 Α7 ------ Β7 V. Description of the invention (36) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Initialization time. Alternatively, DPCM can be configured to trigger a fast start routine. Therefore, during the initial training of the modem system, work 4 2 2 can be performed. (For the sake of brevity, the part of work 422 and the subsequent work can be performed by APCM and DPCM; the quick start process 4 00 illustrates the combined function in a single process work situation). Task 4 2 2 will cause the AP CM and DP CM to initialize in response to some storage parameters related to the previously established communication channel. As described above, the stored parameters are related to the initialization or training of the equalizer, echo canceller, transmission power level, initial signal point constellation, and so on. Task 4 2 2 can be operated in conjunction with program 4 2 1 and is preferably used to obtain and store initialization parameters related to previous connections. In this regard, the procedure 421 may be appropriately designed to periodically store these parameters during the general data mode of the previous connection after a renegotiation process or in response to any conditions or events related to previous communication activities. Program 4 2 1 can also be configured so as not to accidentally store incorrect settings or initialize parameters. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In a typical V · 90 connection, work 4 2 2 is related to the two-point training phase. Using the previous parameters, the modem system can skip or shorten the traditional V.90 stage 2 exploration and ranging procedures and skip or shorten the traditional V.90 stage 3 digital impairment learning and initial training procedures. As shown in Fig. 5, both AP CM and DP CM can transmit training sequences (represented by T R N 1 signal) during work 4 2 2. These training signals can be used to properly adjust equalizer and echo canceler filter taps and facilitate training of the modem system. Therefore, it is possible to perform one of the most time-consuming procedures initiated by V · 90 in an efficient manner with sufficient time for fine-tuning and training (APC M, etc. -39- This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 (Mm) 499809 A7 ___ B7 V. Description of the invention (37) Training of chemistries). (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) In addition to the initial training that occurred during work 4 2 2, work 4 2 4 will also be performed. During work 4 2 4 the data system will perform error correction and / or data compression protocols. In the traditional V · 90 data machine system, the error correction follows the V · 4 2 recommendation, and the data compression follows the V · 42 b i s recommendation. For example, in the general V · 90 operating mode associated with a PPP connection, the V · 42 and V · 42b i s procedures are executed after the last training and before the CH A P / PAP identification procedure. Because CHAP / PAP procedures are more suitable for "error-free" channels, V.42 and V · 42 2 b i s are executed before CPAH / PPP procedures. Unlike traditional V · 90 systems, work 4 2 4 will be executed during Phase 3 of V · 90 startup V · 42b i s ° V · 42b i s moves forward during startup processing to help reduce connection time. In Figure 5, the X ID signal represents a modified version of the traditional V · 4 2 X ID signal. For example, the X ID signal is printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A subset of the X ID parameters used to negotiate compression and so on can be used. It is also possible to combine the different correction signal sequences shown in Fig. 5 to execute part of the V. 4 2 b i s procedure. For example, the C P t signal represents a conventional V 9 0 C P t signal combined with one or more V · 4 2 b i s signals. In the preferred embodiment, the V.4.2bis program is executed to provide an actual "error-free" channel. After working 4 2 4

C〇N N E C T訊息會發給主軟體。C 0 N N E C T訊息 標示數據機系統此時已準備好以初始資料速率傳送資料。 可根據習知技術,格式化、產生、及傳送C 0 N N E C T -40- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 ___ B7 五、發明說明(38 ) 訊息。 爲回應C〇N N E C T訊息,主軟體開始「同時」上 層協定登入程序,舉例而言,CHAP或P A P程序(工 作428)。工作428可由主軟體自動地初始化或爲了 回應使用者登錄而自動地初始化。CHAP/PAP資料 傳送會配合最後訓練處理。在較佳實施例中,A P C Μ及 DP CM會於通訊頻道上將CHAP/PAP鑑識資料當 作擾頻數位資料傳送。鑑識資料的擾頻使得數據機裝置能 夠對鑑識資料執行最後訓練。在傳統的V · 9 0數據機系 統中,最後的訓練訊號會被格式化成擾頻訊號。擾頻訊號 未載有資訊;最後的訓練訊號僅作爲頻譜上的白色源。當 數據機裝置完成訓練處理時,本發明會使最後訓練訊號平 衡以載送使用者資料。雖然C H A P / P A P資料係使用 者資料的較佳形式,但是,本發明不限於鑑識資料的傳送 或交換。此外,特定的擾頻演繹法也會隨應用不同而變。 在圖5中,雙功能訊號係以T R N 2 A / P P P代表 。關於此點,數據機裝置中的接收器區可在第一時間期間 (舉例而言,在資料階段一期間)被以初始資料速率訓練 ,以致於它們可以在後續的時間期間(舉例而言,在資料 階段二期間),無縫地轉換成以最後資料速率操作。此外 ,在第一時間期間而非在數據機系統已被完全地初始化之 後,以初始資料速率執行P P P登入程序。 在初始資料速率時間期間,可執行工作4 3 0以使 A P CM及D P CM能夠以適當方式交換星座參數及調變 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ΙΓ,--Γ 1· -------· 11 —Γ---t---------^ (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(39 ) 參數(在圖5中以C P及Μ P訊號表示)。可以以傳統的 ν · 9 0方式,執行工作4 3 0。在後續的資料模式期間 ’這些參數可由數據機裝置使用。在完成訓練及鑑識程序 之後,系統較佳地以無縫方式轉變至全資料速率。可執行 工作4 3 2以便以全資料速率執行資料傳送。此時期可視 爲資料階段二。一旦數據機系統進入全資料模式,則快速 啓動處理4 0 0即結束。 相對於表1中槪述之傳統的V · 9 0數據機啓動,如 下述表2所示,根據本發明之數據機系統會有縮短的啓動 遲緩。注意,表2中槪述之啓動時間約爲表1中槪述的啓 動時間之一半。在很多情形中,特別是在使用V · 9 0或 舊有的5 6 k b p s數據機系統之Ρ Ρ Ρ撥接網際網路連 接之情形中,可望有可觀的啓動遲緩縮減。 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) - ----:--II 訂--------線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -42- 499809 用 適 度 尺 張 紙 本 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(40 ) 協定 操作 時 間( 秒) —— 撥接 1 一 建立通話 1 v.8_lis(縮短) 交換能力 1 u u 修正的回答音 1 V.90 Phase 3 + V.42/V.42bis 初始APCM訓練;錯誤校正;資料 壓縮 2.5 V. 90Phase 4 + 登入 最後APCM訓練;設定功率位準; 星座傳送;使用者名稱&密碼 2-5 總數=8.5-11.5 表2 —快速的V . 9 0數據機啓動 在其它情形中可實施本發明的技術以減少線路損壞事 件或頻道中斷後與再連接有關之再初始化時間。舉例而言 ,很多電話用戶可能租用電話插播、來電顯示、及其它電 話服務。但是,假使電話線正用於數據機連接時,這些服 務可能不致動或不作用。假使在數據機連接期間電話插播 並非不致動時,則訊號音會中斷數據機連接。假使使用者 決定回答插播電話時,則拿起話筒及掛上話筒之閃燈可能 會使數據機系統重新訓練其接收器或是促成完全的再連接 程序。 國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) -43 I* — ·--Γ -------I -----r---訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(41 ) 數據機系統可以配置成寧可利用儲存的類比及數位損 傷資訊、等化器設定、功率位準、回音消除器設定、星座 、等等,也不執行耗時的再連接或重新訓練程序。假使頻 道連接被電話插播程序、分接的電話裝置處之拿起話筒條 件、來電顯示請求、或任何頻道損壞事件所中斷時,不管 此事件是有計劃的或是無意的,則此儲存的資訊可用以立 即地重設數據機參數。在此情形中,客戶數據機及伺服器 數據機可儲存相關的系統屬性、數據機操作參數、頻道特 性、及/或網路特性。 在一實際的實施例中,爲回應電話插播音,客戶數據 機會通知伺服器進入待機模式。伺服器數據機接著切換至 F S K模式以便當伺服器閒置時,偵測等級2來電顯示資 訊。假使使用者要接答第二通電話時,則客戶數據機會週 期性地傳送待機訊號或心跳音給伺服器以指定伺服器繼續 待機。當第二通電話結束且使用者希望開始資料通話時, 客戶數據機將開始快速再連接握手協定(於下說明)。另 一方面,假使使用者要終止第一通電話時,則可送出話終 訊憩(或者,可結束週期性的待機訊號)。 如同參考先前的頻道參數3 4 2及3 8 2之簡要說明 所述般,快速再連接握手會造成數據機裝置再呼叫待機頻 道的儲存參數及屬性及與收據機裝置有關的儲存操作參數 。藉由此技術,數據機系統可以在以秒計算的時間內再連 接。因此,資料模式使用者將不會於處理進入的電話插播 或來電顯示訊號之後苦於冗長的再連接。資料模式使用者 Γ I I l·--I I I I illl· — — — ^illl----^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -44- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 . B7 五、發明說明(42 ) ’在以此方式使用電話插播的情形下,將能夠接受間歇的 中斷’而不具有與數據機連接有關之顯著延遲。 利用此特點,可以以傳統的P p P模式連接,模擬r 一直連接」模式。舉例而言’可對客戶數據機與伺服器數 據機之間的給定連接,週期性地儲存有關的頻道補償資訊 。客戶使用者可以回答進入的第二通局線電話並如上述般 同時暫停資料模式。此外,假使客戶使用者啓動外送的語 音電話時,資料模式可溫和地終止。在語音電話終止時, 客戶數據機可以再撥打或是重新接觸伺服器數據機並使用 儲存的參數以建立快速連接。 圖7係流程圖,顯示由二數據機裝置執行之快速連接 處理7 0 0的部份,圖6係時序圖6 0 0,對應於說明之 二數據機裝置所執行的快速再連接處理。時序圖6 0 0包 含通常用於傳統的資料通訊協定之情形中的字頭及縮寫。 此處所使用的術語僅用以說明一實際實施例中的本發明之 觀念。但是,本發明可用於任何適當的情形中,且圖6中 所示的二數據機裝置之間的特定的訊號、序列數目、序列 時序、資料速率、及交互作用並非要限制發明之範圍。 在此數據機系統建立通訊活動之後,及典型上在數據 機系統進入全速資料模式之後,會由數據機系統執行快速 再連接處理7 0 0。爲了說明起見,可假定數據機系統係 如上述般配置(或是以適當方式配置以支援不述不同的處 理工作)。可假定執行處理7 0 0之二數據機裝置係與此 處所述之快速再連接技術並容。因此’處理7 0 0無須執 一 ^------------^---------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -45- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 _____ B7 五、發明說明(43 ) 行任何確認或發訊以決定快速再連接程序是否會被執行。 雖然並未要求快速再連接處理7 0 0,但是,數據機 系統可根據上述快速啓動技術而初始化。因此,處理 7 〇 〇會假定二數據機裝置均儲存任何數目之適當的頻道 特性、接收器參數、及其它與數據機系統的初始化、訓練 、及同步化相關的資訊。如上所述,在啓動程序期間可適 當地儲存此資訊,或是在適當的資料模式期間週期地適當 儲存此資訊。處理7 0 0可用以使目前的數據機連接能夠 在數據機資料模式暫停或是任何中斷事件之後快速地重建 °在此情形中,實際的系統可在數據機裝置之間維持通訊 鏈結或連接,並允許客戶數據機裝置的使用者暫停數據機 連接(或是數據機資料通訊模式)。在暫時等待期間,當 客戶側數據機裝置閒置時,使用者能夠回答另一進入的電 話以回應電話插播訊號、發起新的外送電話、等等。 快速再連接處理7 0 0可始於工作7 0 2,在此期間 ,會由DP CM (舉例而言,圖3中所示的數據機3 0 2 )接收再連接標示。可產生再連接標示以回應終止數據機 通訊活動中的暫停之請求(舉例而言,使用者發起的請求 )。舉例而言,可由APCM (舉例而言,數據機304 )產生適當的再連接訊號以回應A P C Μ的使用者發起之 話筒閃燈或回應與A P C Μ相關的應用軟體所產生之指令 。或者,與AP CM相關之AP CM或資料接取配置( D A A )可產生再連接訊號以回應與電話機的話筒拿起狀 態有關的電流變化。此局線使用中偵測技術對習於此技藝 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -46· ifrlrh!——^ — 0----l·——訂---------線_ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 499809 A7 ___ ____ B7 五、發明說明(44 ) 者而言是習知的。再連接標示會通知D P CM,使用者希 望重新建立被置於暫待之目前的數據機連接。在實際的實 施例中,D P C Μ會接收再連接標示及發起工作7 〇 4以 回應再連接標示。 在工作7 0 4期間’ D P C Μ會傳送適當的回覆訊號 ’回覆訊號係較佳地通知A P C Μ快速再連接程序被支援 。在此處所述之實施例中,此回覆訊號可包含如上所述之 適當轉換序列。因此,快速再連接處理可執行工作7 0 4 ,工作7 0 4係類似於配合圖4說明之上述工作4 1 4。 舉例而言,工作7 0 4可使D P CM傳送QT S訊號以使 A P C Μ能夠再度決定D P C Μ的時序階段(在圖6中以 代號6 0 2標示Q T S訊號)。此外,Q T S訊號的再傳 送會使得A P C Μ能夠再度取得資料通訊網路的R B S特 性(假使需要或希望如此做時)。 應注意,對於很多實際的數據機連接而言,在數據機 等待期間,網路連接(及數位塡襯和R B S的相關效果) 將維持一致。當然,也可能有網路連接在數據機等待期間 通話結束以保存網路資源之情形。在這些情形中,特別的 是假使相同的網路連接未再建立時,則網路的數位損傷輪 廓可能無法維持一致。此外,即使網路特性未改變,則假 使數據機連接被置於等待時(特別是假使A P C Μ於等待 期間未從D P C Μ接收訊號時)A P C Μ會遺失其R B S 同步。關於此點,即使在等待期間之後A p C Μ可適當地 使其本身與網路時計再度同步,但是特定的R B s階段仍 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) _ 47 - (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁)C〇N N ECT message will be sent to the main software. The C 0 N N E C T message indicates that the modem system is now ready to transmit data at the initial data rate. C 0 NNECT -40 can be formatted, generated, and transmitted according to conventional technologies. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 499809 A7 ___ B7 V. Description of Invention (38) Message. In response to the CONN N E C T message, the host software starts the "simultaneous" upper-layer protocol login process, for example, the CHAP or P A P process (work 428). Task 428 may be initialized automatically by the main software or automatically in response to a user login. CHAP / PAP data transmission will be processed in conjunction with the final training. In a preferred embodiment, APCM and DPCM will transmit CHAP / PAP identification data as scrambled digital data on the communication channel. The scrambling of forensics allows the modem device to perform final training on the forensics. In a traditional V · 90 modem system, the final training signal is formatted as a scrambled signal. The scrambled signal contains no information; the last training signal serves only as a white source on the spectrum. When the modem device completes the training process, the present invention balances the last training signal to carry user data. Although C H A P / P A P data is a preferred form of user data, the invention is not limited to the transmission or exchange of authentication data. In addition, the specific scrambling deduction method will vary from application to application. In Figure 5, the dual function signal is represented by T R N 2 A / P P P. In this regard, the receiver areas in the modem device can be trained at the initial data rate during the first time period (for example, during data phase one) so that they can be trained at subsequent time periods (for example, During data phase two), seamlessly transitions to operate at the final data rate. In addition, the P P P login procedure is performed at the initial data rate during the first time, rather than after the modem system has been fully initialized. During the initial data rate time, work can be performed to enable AP CM and DP CM to exchange constellation parameters and adjust in a proper manner. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). Γ ,-Γ 1 · ------- · 11 —Γ --- t --------- ^ (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 499809 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (39) parameters (represented by CP and MP signals in FIG. 5). Work can be performed in the traditional ν · 9 0 manner, 430. These parameters can be used by the modem device during the subsequent data mode. After completing the training and identification procedures, the system preferably transitions to the full data rate in a seamless manner. Task 4 3 2 can be performed to perform data transfer at full data rate. This period can be regarded as the second phase of the data. Once the modem system enters the full data mode, the quick start process is ended. Compared to the conventional V · 90 modem startup described in Table 1, as shown in Table 2 below, the modem system according to the present invention has a reduced startup delay. Note that the start-up time described in Table 2 is about half of the start-up time described in Table 1. In many cases, especially in the case of PP PP dial-up Internet connection using V · 90 or the old 5 6 k b ps modem system, considerable start-up delays are expected to be reduced. (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page)-----:-Order II -------- Line · Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives Paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) -42- 499809 Printed with a moderate rule on paper A7 B7 by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the invention (40) Agreement operation time (seconds) — — Dial 1-Establish a call 1 v.8_lis (shortened) Exchange capacity 1 uu Corrected answer tone 1 V.90 Phase 3 + V.42 / V.42bis Initial APCM training; error correction; data compression 2.5 V. 90Phase 4 + Login last APCM training; set power level; constellation transmission; user name & password 2-5 total = 8.5-11.5 Table 2-fast V. 9 0 modem start-up In other situations the technology of the present invention can be implemented In order to reduce the re-initialization time related to the reconnection after a line damage event or a channel interruption. For example, many phone users may rent call insertion, caller ID, and other phone services. However, these services may not be activated or functional if the telephone line is being used for modem connection. If the telephone plug-in is not inactive during the modem connection, the tone will interrupt the modem connection. If the user decides to answer an intercom call, picking up the microphone and flashing the microphone may cause the modem system to retrain its receiver or facilitate a complete reconnection procedure. National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 χ 297 mm) -43 I * — · --Γ ------- I ----- r --- Order -------- -Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and printed on 499809 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (41) The modem system can be configured to use the stored analog and digital damage information , Equalizer settings, power levels, echo canceller settings, constellations, etc., nor does it perform time-consuming reconnection or retraining procedures. If the channel connection is interrupted by a call insertion procedure, a pick-up microphone condition at the tapped telephone device, a caller ID request, or any channel damage event, whether the event is planned or unintentional, this stored information Can be used to reset modem parameters immediately. In this case, the customer modem and server modem can store related system attributes, modem operating parameters, channel characteristics, and / or network characteristics. In a practical embodiment, in response to a phone call, the customer data opportunity notifies the server to enter standby mode. The server modem then switches to F S K mode to detect level 2 caller ID information when the server is idle. If the user wants to answer the second call, the customer data machine will periodically send a standby signal or heartbeat to the server to designate the server to continue standby. When the second call ends and the user wishes to start a data call, the customer modem will begin a quick reconnection handshake agreement (described below). On the other hand, if the user wants to terminate the first call, he can send a call break (or, it can end the periodic standby signal). As described with reference to the previous brief description of the channel parameters 3 4 2 and 3 8 2, the fast reconnection handshake will cause the modem device to call the standby channel's storage parameters and attributes and the storage operation parameters related to the receipt device. With this technology, the modem system can be reconnected in seconds. As a result, data mode users will not suffer from lengthy reconnections after processing incoming call spots or caller ID signals. Data mode user Γ II l · --IIII illl · — — — ^ illl ---- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -44- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7. B7 V. Description of Invention (42) 'In the case of using the telephone interruption in this way, you will be able to accept intermittent interruptions' without With significant latency related to modem connection. With this feature, it can be connected in the traditional P p P mode, and the analog r is always connected "mode. For example, 'for a given connection between a client modem and a server modem, the relevant channel compensation information is stored periodically. The customer user can answer the incoming second line call and pause the data mode at the same time as described above. In addition, if the customer user initiates an outgoing voice call, the data mode can be gently terminated. When the voice call is terminated, the customer modem can redial or re-contact the server modem and use the stored parameters to establish a quick connection. Fig. 7 is a flowchart showing a part of the fast connection processing 700 performed by the two modem devices, and Fig. 6 is a timing chart 600, corresponding to the fast reconnection processing performed by the second modem device illustrated. The timing diagram 6 0 0 contains the prefixes and abbreviations commonly used in the case of traditional data communication protocols. The terminology used herein is only used to explain the concept of the present invention in a practical embodiment. However, the present invention can be used in any suitable situation, and the specific signals, number of sequences, sequence timing, data rate, and interaction between the two modem devices shown in FIG. 6 are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. After the modem system establishes communication activities, and typically after the modem system enters the full-speed data mode, the modem system will perform fast reconnection processing 7 0 0. For the sake of illustration, it can be assumed that the modem system is configured as described above (or is configured in an appropriate manner to support different processing tasks that are not described). It can be assumed that the processing device of the 700 bis modem is compatible with the fast reconnection technique described herein. Therefore, there is no need to deal with 7 0 0 ^ ------------ ^ --------- ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) -45- Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 _____ B7 V. Description of the Invention (43) Any confirmation or communication shall be made to determine a quick reconnection Whether the program will be executed. Although fast reconnection is not required to process 700, the modem system can be initialized according to the above-mentioned fast start technology. Therefore, processing 7000 will assume that both modem devices store any number of appropriate channel characteristics, receiver parameters, and other information related to the initialization, training, and synchronization of the modem system. As mentioned above, this information can be stored appropriately during the startup process or periodically and appropriately during the appropriate data mode. Processing 7 0 0 can be used to enable the current modem connection to be quickly reestablished after the modem mode is suspended or any interruption event. In this case, the actual system can maintain a communication link or connection between modem devices. , And allows the user of the customer modem device to suspend the modem connection (or modem data communication mode). During the temporary waiting period, when the client-side modem device is idle, the user can answer another incoming call in response to a call insertion signal, initiate a new outgoing call, and so on. The fast reconnection process 7 0 0 may begin at work 7 2 2. During this period, the DP CM (for example, the modem 3 2 2 shown in FIG. 3) receives the reconnection indication. A reconnect flag can be generated in response to a request to suspend a modem communication activity (for example, a user-initiated request). For example, APCM (for example, modem 304) may generate an appropriate reconnection signal in response to a microphone flash initiated by a user of APCM or in response to a command generated by an application software associated with APCM. Alternatively, the AP CM or data access configuration (DAA) associated with the AP CM may generate a reconnect signal in response to a change in current related to the pickup state of the telephone handset. The in-process detection technology used in this bureau is applicable to the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) for this paper. -46 · ifrlrh! —— ^ — 0 ---- l · —— Order --------- Line _ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 499809 A7 ___ ____ B7 V. Description of Invention (44) It is familiar to the person. The reconnect flag will inform the DPCM that the user wishes to re-establish the current modem connection that has been placed on hold. In an actual embodiment, the DPCM will receive the reconnection indication and initiate a task 704 in response to the reconnection indication. During work 704, 'DPCM will send the appropriate reply signal.' The reply signal preferably informs APPC that the fast reconnection procedure is supported. In the embodiments described herein, this reply signal may include a suitable conversion sequence as described above. Therefore, the fast reconnection process can perform work 704, which is similar to the work 4 1 4 described above in conjunction with FIG. 4. For example, work 704 enables the DPCM to transmit the QT S signal so that APCM can again determine the timing phase of the DPCM (the QTS signal is denoted by the code 602 in FIG. 6). In addition, the retransmission of the Q T S signal will allow APCM to regain the R B S characteristics of the data communications network (if needed or desired to do so). It should be noted that for many actual modem connections, the network connection (and the related effects of digital backing and RSB) will remain the same while the modem is waiting. Of course, there may be cases where the network connection ends while the modem is waiting to save the network resources. In these cases, especially if the same network connection is no longer established, the network's digital impairment profile may not be consistent. In addition, even if the network characteristics have not changed, if the modem connection is put on hold (especially if AP CP does not receive a signal from DP CP during the wait period) AP CP will lose its R B S synchronization. In this regard, even if Ap C M can properly synchronize itself with the network timepiece again after the waiting period, the specific RB s stage still applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public %) _ 47-(Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page)

P 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(45 ) 然未知。因此,快速再連接處理7 0 0會較佳地配置成考 慮網路連接及R B S時序已改變。 回覆訊號也包含跟在轉換序列之後的適當訊號點序列 。因此,在工作704之後,DPCM可執行工作706 以適當地傳送訊號點序列給A P C Μ。如同有關工作 4 1 6之上述所述般,訊號點序列可被視爲修改過的回答 音,舉例而言,AN S p cm訊號(在圖6中以代號 604標示)。ANSpcm訊號604可被適當地格式 化成使A P C Μ能夠決定或識別目前的通訊頻道或網路的 特性,特別是數位塡襯及/或其它數位損傷。 A N S p c m訊號6 0 4也會配置成提供適於使網路回音 消除器不致動及使網路回音抑制器不致動之音調。 在實際的實施例中,AP CM會預料AN S p cm訊 號6 0 4的傳送。舉例而言,A P C Μ可配置成條件化接 收器以便在其傳送再連接標示給D P C Μ之後,接收 A N S p c m訊號6 0 4。因此,快速再連接處理7 0 0 可包含查詢工作7 0 8,其較佳地決定AN S p cm訊號 6 0 4是否已由AP CM接收及/或DP CM是否收到 AP CM已收到ANS p cm訊號6 0 4之適當確認。假 使爲否,則處理7 0 0會跳出且數據機系統可進行傳統的 再連接常式。假使查詢工作7 0 8決定A N S p c m訊號 7 0 6被適當地接收時,則A P C Μ會如上所述般處理收 到的訊號以使A P C Μ能夠決定與重新建立的頻道有關之 數位損傷。 llllll· — — — — · — - I I I l· I ! β (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -48- 499809 Α7 ___ Β7 五、發明說明(46 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 較佳地執行工作7 1 0以使二數據機裝置能夠叫回及 取得與先前的頻道連接相關之特性及參數,先前的頻道係 數據機連接被置於暫待之前的頻道。工作7 1 0可促使 D P CM接取先前的頻道資訊3 4 2及使AP CM接取先 前的頻道資訊3 8 4。如上所述,此資訊可包含與下述相 關之一或更多參數:目前的頻道條件(如同先前決定般) 、與數據機接收器相關的任何數目之設定、通訊網路的特 性、等等。工作7 1 0使數據機系統能夠快速地取還這些 儲存的參數及以適當的方式重設數據機裝置以取代頻道之 獨立的重新評估及取代完全再訓練處理。一旦D P C Μ從 A P C Μ再度接收再連接識別標記時,可由其執行工作 710,而在APCM接收ANSpcm訊號604之前 ,可由APCM執行工作7 1 0。假使工作7 1 〇由 A P C Μ執行時,則A P C Μ等化器會根據先前的頻道資 訊3 8 4被初始化,以致於A N S p c m訊號6 〇 4可被 適當地接收及分析。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 D P C Μ可根據多種技術以再取得其時序同步,舉例 而言,這些技術可爲ITU — Τ建議V. 34 (國際電信 聯盟,1994年九月)揭示之傳統的V.34半雙工主 頻道同步程序,此處將其倂入參考。換言之,如圖6所示 ,APCM可配置成傳送ΡΡ訊號6 10以使DPCM接 收器能夠使其時序恢復及載波恢復同步。S及S \前言訊 號(代號分別爲6 0 6及6 0 8 )可用以起動自動增益控 制元件等等。B 1訊號6 1 2可被視爲用以啓動D P C Μ -49- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 499809 Α7 __ Β7 五、發明說明(47 ) 擾頻器、格子碼化器等等之前言序列。這些訊號及序列係 詳細地揭示於V · 3 4建議中,此處將不詳述之。 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 同時,DPCM可傳送R訊號6 16,接著傳送11\ 訊號6 1 8及B 1訊號6 2 0。這些序列也作爲使 A P C Μ能夠準備資料模式之適當的前言序列。這些訊號 及序列係詳述於V · 9 Q建議中,此處將不詳述。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 爲回應再同步序列,數據機系統會進入資料模式且系 統開始以全資料速率傳送資料(工作7 1 2 )。換言之, 重建資料傳送模式而不用完全地終止先前的連接。在圖6 中資料模式係由序列6 1 4及6 2 0表示。注意,與快速 啓動處理4 0 0不同,快速再連接處理7 0 0無須執行頻 道特性的比較(參見工作4 2 0 )、初始訓練程序(參見 工作4 2 2 )、錯誤校正和資料壓縮程序(參見工作 4 2 4 )、最後訓練程序(參見工作4 2 8 )、鑑識交換 (參見工作4 2 8 )、或是星座和數據機參數之交換(參 見工作430)。關於PAP/CHAP鑑識資訊,數據 機系統可適當地配置成在等待期間維持P P P / T C Ρ / I Ρ協定’以致於Ρ Ρ Ρ鑑識資料無須被傳送。因此,數 據機系統可重建其數據機連接,而不用浪費時間執行數種 傳統的初始化工作。在典型的實際系統中,可採用快速再 連接處理以在小於1 · 5秒的時間內重建資料模式。 快速再連接程序之另一版本可採用類似於時序圖 500 (參考圖5)之時序圖。但是,在此實施例中,與 時序圖5 0 0相關的上述訊號區段中的數個區段可以在長 -50- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 499809 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(48 ) 度上縮減,因而減少傳統的再連接時間。舉例而言,由於 不同的T R N訓練序列及參數交換訊號無須載送基本資訊 ,所以它們可以可觀地縮短。因爲實際的實施之需,可會g 希望以此方式使通用的序列結構保持完整(取代從時序圖 500中消除區段)。事實上,從軟體實施的觀點而言, 可以以相當直接的方式調整區段長度,而從現在的協定中 移除整個區段是耗時及困難的工作。雖然此另一實施例的 再連接時間比參考時序圖6 0 0之上述說明的時間(舉例 而言,達到2 · 5秒)還長,但是,其仍然比執行傳統的 重新初始化程序所需的時間還要顯著地減少。 如先前所述般,當電話線正用於數據機連接時,電話 插播及相關的電話特點會有麻煩。爲回應電話插播警示訊 號,數據機連接通常會被中斷,數據機裝置不知道打斷的 原因。電話插播警示訊號會造成數據機裝置斷線或進入冗 長的再訓練模式。此外,在很多情形中,消費者不能利用 電話插播服務。一般而言,本發明以下述方式解決此問題 • ( 1 )允許任一方的數據機裝置請求立即的話終以回應 電話插播警示;(2 )允許第一數據機裝置請求第二數據 機裝置進入等待,及允許第二數據機裝置接受或拒絕請求 ;及(3 )允許任一方的數據機裝置請求快速再連接程序 (如上所述)。藉由此發訊技術,數據機連接可以被終止 通話、被置於等待、或快速再連接,以回應諸如電話插播 警示等警示訊號。同樣地,假使數據機連接被置於等待時 ,則在等待期間之後,可採用相同的發訊機制以再連接數 (請先閱讀背面之注咅S事項再填寫本頁) - 訂---------線- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -51 - 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(49 ) 據機時段。 假使二端裝置(舉例而言,V · 9 0系統中的 D P C Μ及A P C Μ )與數據機等待特性並容時,則利用 適當的發訊設計以使端裝置能夠於需要時切換操作模式。 雖然於此係以A P CM在客戶端及d P CM在伺服器或中 央端之數據機系統的情形下,說明發訊設計及不同的處理 ’但是,本發明不限於此。舉例而言,此處所述的技術可 以等效地應用於二客戶數據機裝置之間的通訊活動的情形 或是V · 3 4數據機系統的情形。 圖1 6係數據機系統6 0 0可操作之舉例說明的環境 之略圖。數據機系統1 6 0 0通常包含第一數據機裝置 1602、及第二數據機裝置1 6 0 4,第一數據機裝置 1 6 0 2與中央側有關,第二數據機裝置1 6 0 4位於客 戶側1 6 7 0。在典型的V · 9 0系統中中,第一數據機 裝置1 6 0 2可爲DP CM,而第二數據機裝置1 6 04 可爲A P C Μ。D P C Μ 1 6 0 2會經由數位鏈結而耦 合至中央局1606,而APCM 1604會經由諸如 地方迴路等類比鏈結而耦合至中央局1 6 0 6。應瞭解數 據機系統1 6 0 0可包含增加的元件及與上述快速啓動常 式和/或快速再連接程序相關的功能。 圖1 6也顯示呼叫裝置1 6 0 8 (其能夠將進入的通 話置於客戶側)、位於客戶側之並聯回答裝置1 6 i 〇、 及位於客戶側之串聯回答裝置1 6 1 1。如圖1 6所示, 並聯的回答裝置1 6 1 0會連接成其以同時方式與 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - 訂---------線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(50 ) A P C Μ 1 6 0 4接收相同的通話。相對地,串聯回答 裝置1 6 1 1會連接成APCM 1 604將通話傳給它 ;A P c Μ 1 6 0 4會以傳統方式控制或調節通至或來 自串列回答裝置1611之通話交通。經由中央局 1 606,在呼叫裝置1608及回答裝置1610和 1 6 1 1之間建立通話,且經由中央局1 6 0 6,在 D P C Μ 1602與APCM 1604之間建立數據 機連接。 一般而言,數據機系統可配置成支援發訊機制,發訊 機制係回應電話插播及可能需要中斷數據機連接之其它情 形。舉例而言,APCM 1604可傳送適當格式化的 訊號以啓動數據機等待狀態,D P C Μ 1 6 0 2可傳送 不同的訊號以確認數據機等待請求,A P C Μ 1604 可傳送又另一訊號以請求快速再連接程序(如上所述)啓 動,且任一方數據機裝置可傳送代表話終請求之訊號。爲 了簡明起見,圖1 6係以此處所述的舉例說明之處理相關 的方式,說明APCM 1604及DPCM 1602 。在實際的實施例中,每一數據機裝置均能夠作爲傳送或 接收數據機,且每一數據機裝置能夠產生此處所述的不同 訊號。 DPCM 1602包含發射機區1612及接收器 區1 6 1 4,二者均可根據傳統的技術及根據上述數據機 系統300的說明(參見圖3)而配置。DPCM 1 6 0 2能夠在初始程序、資料模式、等待模式、及傳送 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) - ϋ ϋ n n n n 一:eJ n >1 n n ϋ I ϋ I · 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -53- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 -----_ 五、發明說明(51 ) 模式期間傳送一 訊號 席μ ^ 一 ^L '序列、及音調。如上所述, D P C Μ 1 6 〇 2可配置成傳送適當的轉換序列 1616及與快速啓動常式或快速再連接程序相關的特徵 訊號點序歹“舉例而言,A N s p c m訊號丄6丄8 ) 1 1。在貝料模式期間’ DpcM 16〇2會根據適當 的資料傳送設計以傳送資料1 6 2 〇。 DPCM 1 602也能夠傳送可由apcM 1 6 0 4及/或中央局1 6 〇 6接收之一些訊號。舉例而 言,如此處所述,D P CM i 6 〇 2能夠傳送「A」音 §周1 6 2 2及「B」音調丄6 2 4。在一實際的實施例中 ,「A」苜調1δ22係2400Hz的音調,而「β」 首調1 6 24係1 20〇Ηζ的音調(如同I TU — Τ建 議V · 34所揭示般)。當然,數據機裝置可產生及處理 任何適當的音調或訊號以取代(或增加)這些預定的音調 。DPCM 1 6 0 2也會配置成傳送一些與數據機等待 模式的初始化、等待期間之後數據機時段的再連接、及數 據機連接話終等有關之增加訊號。舉例而言,D P C Μ 1 6 0 2能夠傳送數據機等待請求1 6 2 6、數據機等 待確認1 6 2 8、快速再連接請求1 6 3 0、及中斷訊號 1 6 3 2 (此處稱爲「數據機狀態訊號」)。這些訊號的 格式及功能將於下述中更詳細地說明。 DPCM 1 6 0 2也包含訊號偵測元件1 6 3 4, 其可使用任何習知技術以偵測、分析、及解譯A P C Μ 1 6 0 4及/或中央局1 6 0 6所傳送之控制訊號、請 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -54 - I ---I Γ ! I ---· I---r--- 訂·!------線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明拉) 求、及音調。舉例而言,訊號偵測元件1 6 3 4可利用傳 統的音調偵測器及/或配置成偵測及分辨此處所述之不同 訊號之傳統的V · 3 4或V · 9 0差動相位移鍵( D P S K )接收器。 作爲此處所述之發訊設計,以類似於D P C Μ 1602之方式,較佳地配置APCM 1604。換言 之,APCM 1604能夠傳送「A」音調1642、 「B」音調1644、數據機等待請求1646、數據機 等待確認1 6 4 8、快速再連接請求1 6 5 0、及中斷訊 號1652。此外,APCM 1604可配置成會產生 來電ID音調1654以通知中央局1606,客戶端支 援來電I D特性(如同來電I D元件1 6 5 6所述)。根 *據目前的標準,來電I D音調1 6 5 4係具有約5 5 — 6 5毫秒長度之DTMF「D」音調。當然,APCM 1 6 0 4會在資料模式期間傳送資料1 6 5 8。 如同有關DP CM 1 6 0 2之上述說明所述般, APCM 1 6 0 4較佳地包含發訊偵測元件1 6 6 0, 其使A P C Μ 1 6 0 4能夠接收、偵測、及分析 D P C Μ 1 6 0 2所傳送之不同的發訊音調及序列。以 此方式,APCM 1604及DPCM 1602能夠 接收訊號並且能夠切換操作模式以回應特定訊號或收到的 訊號。 中央局1 6 0 6會以傳統方式配置成執行與數據機、 語音、及傳真電話有關之電路切換。中央區1 6 0 6可支 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)-55 _ ΙΓ----^------- -----r---訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 ____B7 五、發明說明(53 ) 援任何數目的客戶側且中央局1 6 0 6可在操作上耦合至 任何數目的其它中央局、中央側數據機、等等。如上簡述 ,APCM 1604、回答裝置1610、及來電 I D元件1 6 5 6可位於客戶側1 6 7 0。因此, APCM 1604、回答裝置1610、及來電ID元 件1 6 5 6均由中央局1 6 06支援。 中央區1 6 0 6包含適當的切換結構1 6 7 2以在適 當的各方之間安排通話之路線。舉例而言,切換結構 1 6 72可切換至第一狀態以在DPCM 1 6 0 2與 AP CM 1 6 0 4之間建立數據機連接及切換至第二狀 態以在呼叫裝置1 6 0 8與回答裝置1 6 1 0之間建立語 音連接。此外,切換結構1 6 7 2能夠暫時地中斷連接以 將控制訊號、資料、或音調傳送至目前的電路或局線。關 於此點,中央區1 6 0 6可視特定的情形而傳送一些振鈴 訊號1 6 7 4、警示訊號1 6 7 6、來電I D資料 1 6 7 8、及其它資訊。舉例而言,根據目前的方法’中 央局1 6 0 6可暫時地打斷語音電話及傳送電話插播訊號 1 6 7 6給客戶側1 6 7 0。假使客戶接收進來的電話’ 則切換結構1 6 7 2會再配置成安排進來的電話至客戶側 1 6 7 6,而原先的電話會被置於等待狀態。如同下述詳 述般,採用類似的路由以將數據機通話置於等待° 如先前所述,發訊設計較佳地採用階段2發訊’其也 是由傳統V · 3 4及V · 9 0數據機系統所使用。此外’ 發訊設計使用D P S K傳送技術,其允許發訊以無縫方式 J------------r—tr---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 56- 499809 A7 厂 —___B7___ 五、發明說明(54 ) 與v · 3 4及V · 9 0再訓練程序整合。訊號會被配置成 它們能由V · 34/V · 90 DPSK接收器或是相當 簡單的音調偵測器所偵測。在一實際實施例中,數據機等 待請求、數據機等待確認、快速再連接請求、及中斷訊號 會領先音調A或音調B —段時間(舉例而言,至少5 0毫 秒)。此技術平衡傳統的V · 3 4及V · 9 0數據機系統 所採用的A及B音調之使用,及利用已由數據機系統使用 之調變設計。因此,由於D P C Μ 1 6 0 2典型上會被 條件化以接收D P S Κ訊號,發訊設計容易實施。 跟隨Α或Β音調之數據機裝態訊號較佳地根據重覆的 位元樣式當作D P S K訊號傳送。在較佳實施例中,數據 機狀態訊號係與八個重覆之四位元樣式有關的D P S K訊 號,其中不同的樣式對應不同的數據機狀態訊號。希望使 用四位元樣式以使簡單的音調偵測器能夠用於發訊偵測元 件1634及1660 ;較短的位元樣式造成較少數與 .D P S K訊號有關之頻率成份。結果,訊號偵測設計無須 訂---------線籲. (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 不中 於3 用表 。 述 式下 常於 理示 處顯 的式 雜樣 複元 之位 容的 內明 譜說 頻之 之號 率訊 頻態 量狀 大機 析據 分數 用的 採同。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 499809 A7 ----- B7 五、發明說明(55 ) 數據機狀態訊號 訊號縮寫 DPSK樣式 中斷訊號 DC 0101 __ 數據機等待請求 ΜΗ 0011 數據機等待確認 ΜΗΑ 0001 快速再連接請求 QPR Oil 1 表3 -數據機狀態訊號 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 較佳地選取特定的位元樣式以致於所造成的D P S K 訊號能與「保留」用於其它資料通訊協定情形之D P S K 訊號區別。舉例而言,全部爲〇之D P S K樣式等於A或 B音調,且全部爲1之DP SK樣式等於V · 3 4 I N F Ο M A R K訊號。此外,可適當地選取特別的位元 樣式以致於所造成的D P S K訊號容易由音調偵測器偵測 。對於表3中所示之範例位元樣式而言,數據機狀態訊號 將具有列於下述表4及5中的頻率內容,其中頻率係以赫 茲爲單位,X係代表大於臨限位準之頻譜內容,而虛線係 代表低於臨限位準之頻譜內容。對於表3中所示之範例 D P S K位元樣式而言,較低的頻譜能量成份比相同頻率 之較高的頻譜能量成分低至少8 d B。結果,縱使有些共 用的頻率成份存在,仍可區別不同的數據機狀態訊號。 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -58 - Α7 Β7 五、 發明說明(56 ) ----〜 900 975 1050 1125 1200 1275 1350 1425 1500 DC X X μη X X X X X ΜΗα X X ORR X 晦 X 袠4 一用於數據機狀態訊號之頻率成份(A P C Μ ) ——-- 2100 2175 2250 2325 2400 2475 2550 2625 2700 DC X X ΜΗ X X X X X ΜΗΑ X X QRR X __ __ X 表5 -用於數據機狀態訊號之頻率成份(D P C Μ ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - 訂---------線< 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A Ρ CM及D Ρ CM所使用之不同的頻率範圍與二數 據機裝置使用不同的載波之舉例說明的應用有關。舉例而 言,在傳統的V · 9 0系統中,D P C Μ使用接近 2 400Hz之發訊(音調Β及DPSK載波),而 A P C Μ使用接近1 2 0 0 Η z之發訊。此特點係源自傳 統的V . 3 4設計,在此設計中,呼叫數據機使用接近 1 2 0 0 Η ζ而回答數據機使用接近2 4 0 OH ζ之發訊 。結果,二譜頻樣式會相同,但在1 200Hz與 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -59- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 B7_I_ 五、發明說明(57 ) 2 4 〇 〇 Η z之間偏移。此方法確保即使二端正傳送相同 型式的訊號時,端裝置能適當地偵測訊號。 在實際的系統中,數據機狀態訊號偵測無須偵測給定 訊號之整個「頻譜指紋」。訊號偵測元件1 6 3 4及 1 6 6 0配置成爲了標示匹配而偵測及分析不同數目的頻 譜成份。舉例而言,如表4中所示,假使訊號含有位於 1 0 50Hz及1 3 50Hz之相當高的頻譜能量,則訊 號可爲中斷訊號或是數據機等待請求。因此,訊號偵測常 式將針對900Hz、 1200Hz、及/或1500 Η z之頻譜內容繼續分析訊號及作出適當的決定。 圖8係時序圖,顯示目前的數據機連接被電話插播標 示中斷且當進來的電話由客戶端回答時數據機連接被置於 等待之情形。不論客戶側1 6 7 0採用並聯的回答裝置 1610或是串聯的回答裝置1611 ,圖8均可應用。 訊號、序列、音調、命令、等等係顯示與A P C Μ、 D P CM、及中央局有關(中央局可以以訊號而與 AP CM相關連及以訊號而與DP CM相關連)。爲方便 起見,此處係在數據機系統1 6 0 0的情形下,說明與圖 8有關的處理。 在資料模式期間,中央局1 6 0 6會暫時中斷數據機 連接並將警示訊號802送至APCM 1604。警示 訊號可爲傳統的電話插播警示且其包含人類可聽到的成份 (舉例而言,聲頻音調)及可由通訊裝置或機械偵測之成 份。根據大部份的電話插播協定,警示訊號成份會序列地 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------I ------^--I I ^---I I I I I - (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 499809 A7 __ _B7 ____ 五、發明說明(58 ) 傳送。爲回應警示訊號802,APCM 1604會送 出DTMF音調8 0 4以向中央局請求來電I d資訊。如 上所述,首§周8 0 4可爲具有約5 5 - 6 5毫秒持續時間 之DTMF「D」音調的短猝發。假設中央局i6〇6接 收及辨認D T M F音調8 0 4,則其會將來電i d資料 8 0 5格式化並將其傳送至客戶側1 6 7 0。如圖1 6所 示,以適當的方式接收及處理來電ID資料805 (在圖 1 6中以代號1 6 7 8表示)’以由來電I D元件顯示或 分析。 爲回應中央局1 606將APCM 1 604切離, D P CM會藉由傳送諸如「B」音調8 0 6等適當的訊號 以開始再訓練程序。在實際的應用中,當來電I D請求 8 0 4及來電I D資料8 0 5正由中央局1 6 0 6接收、 處理及傳送時,「B」音調806通常會被傳送。當 DPCM 1602等待APCM 1604以「A」音 調8 0 8回覆時,「B」音調8 0 6會被連續地傳送。假 使APCM 1604從DPCM 1604收到「B」 音調806時,其會傳送「A」苜調808。如上所述, 「A」音調8 0 8較佳地被傳送至少最小的持續時間(舉 例而言,5 0毫秒),以給予D P C Μ 1 6 0 2機會去 接收它。假使D P C Μ 1 6 0 2在特定的期間內未收到 「A」音調8 0 8,則其最後會使其本身中斷。 假使APCM 1 604的使用者希望回答進來的電 話,則數據機等待請求8 1 0會在「A」音調8 0 8之後 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂----------線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規ί各(210 X 297公釐 1 ~qU~" 499809 A7B7 五、發明說明(59 ) 被傳送。數據機等待請求8 1 0由客戶側1 6 7 0處的適 胃裝置自動地提供或被提示以回應使用者命令。數據機等 待請求8 1 0可如上述般格式化,其會較佳地被傳送至少 最少一段時間。在一實際的實施例中,數據機等待請求 8 1 〇會被傳送約5 3毫秒(此處所述的所有數據機狀態 訊號可具有類似的最少持續時間)。不同於傳統的 V·34或V·90數據機系統,在DPCM 1602 收到「A」音調8 0 8時,不會執行真正的再訓練程序。 但是,爲了回應數據機等待請求8 1 〇,D P C Μ 1 6 0 2會傳送數據機等待確認8 1 2最少一段時間,舉 例而言,約5 3毫秒。 在D P C Μ 1 6 0 2傳送數據機等待確認8 1 2之 後’當其維持等待狀態時,其會較佳地繼續傳送「Β」音 調8 0 6。爲回應數據機等待確認8 1 2,A P C Μ 1 6 0 4會產生適當的閃爍訊號8 1 4以指示中央局 1 6 0 6切離數據機連接及將進入的通話8 1 6切入。此 外,手機(或其它適當的回答裝置)會關始接收進來的通 話;APCM 1604可配置成以適當方式安排進入的 訊號至並聯的回答裝置1 6 1 0或是串聯的回答裝置 1 6 1 1。此外,當手機連接時(在週期8 1 8期間), A P C Μ 1 6 0 4可被置於閒置或是「聽筒掛上」狀態 。因此,客戶側1 6 7 0處的使用者可以進行進入的通話 816,而DPCM 1602維持等待。數據機連接可 藉由快速數據機再連接程序而重建(於下說明)。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - 訂---------線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規袼(210 X 297公釐) -62 - 499809 A7 B7_;___ 五、發明說明(60 ) 圖9係時序圖,說明D P CM 1 6 0 2要再連接以 回應進入的通話終止之情形。圖9中所示之處理假定:( 1)DPCM 1602係處於等待狀態;(2)回答裝 置1610係與APCM 1604並聯;及(3)回答 裝置1 6 1 0終止進入的通話,舉例而言,在呼叫裝置 1 6 0 8被置於「聽筒掛上」之前,回答裝置1 6 1 0被 置於「聽筒掛上」。爲了說明此點,並聯意指A P C Μ 1 6 0 4及回答裝置1 6 1 0會以同時之方式從中央局 1 6 0 6接收相同的訊號。 爲回應進入的通話之終止,中央局1 6 0 6將以傳統 方式偵測「掛上」,舉例而言,使用習知的局線偵測技術 。最後,中央局1 606會切離或中斷進入的通話、切入 DPCM 1602、及產生諸如振鈴訊號902等適當 的訊號。振鈴訊號9 0 2用以警示客戶側1 6 7 0處的使 用者原先的電話仍在等待且已準備好再連接。爲回應振鈴 訊號902,APCM 1604會被置於「拿起聽筒」 以致於其能再度從中央區1 6 0 6接收訊號。因此,振鈴 訊號9 0 2通知A P C Μ 1 6 0 4,進入的通話已話終 及/或A P C Μ 1 6 0 4可繼續進行數據機再連接程序 。如同參考圖8之上述所述般,APCM 1 6 04會產 生「A」音調9 0 4 (至少5 0毫秒)以回應「Β」音調 9 0 6之偵測。在「A」音調9 0 4之後,A P C Μ 1 6 0 4會傳送快速再連接請求9 0 8以啓動快速再連接 程序(如同圖6及7的情形之上述所述般)。因此’爲回 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂!!線, 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -63- 499809 A7 _. ———… B7 五、發明說明(61 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 應快速再連接請求9 0 8的偵測,D P C Μ 1 6 0 2較 佳地傳送Q T S訊號9 1 0,A N S p c m序列9 1 2跟 隨在後。Q T S訊號9 1 0的特性、格式、及功能如上所 述。假使二數據機裝置均支援上述之快速再連接特點,則 可在相當短的時間內重新建立等待的數據機連接。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖1 0係時序圖,說明並聯的回答裝置1 6 1 0被置 於「放下話筒」之前進入的通話被終止之情形。在此情形 中,當進入的通話由呼叫裝置1 6 0 8開始終止時,中央 局1 6 0 6會將客戶側1 6 7 0再連接至原先的通話(在 本實施例中爲數據機連接)。結果,由D P C Μ 1602傳送的「Β」音調再度可於AP CM 16 0 4 處取得。不論APCM 1 6 04目前是否在「拿起聽筒 」或是「掛上聽筒」狀態中,其會較佳地偵測D P C Μ 1 602是否已再連接。應瞭解APCM 1 6 04可 採用任何數目的習知技術(可視特定的實施例而變)以偵 測再連接。舉例而言,D P C Μ 1 6 0 2可偵測來自 DPCM 1602之「Β」音調,其可在預定的暫停時 間之後自動地反應,或是利用局線使用用技術以感測進入 的通話之終止。一旦二數據機裝置彼此重新取得通訊時, 則快速再連接常式會如同參考圖9之上述所述般地進行。 關於圖1 0中所示之情形,可能需要使A P C Μ 1 6 0 4在一定時間內回應以確保中央局1 6 0 6未將再 連接嘗試視爲話筒閃爍或是中斷。舉例而言,在較佳實施 例中,APCM 1 604配置成在200毫秒內回應進 -64- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 499809 A7P Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. The description of the invention (45) is unknown. Therefore, the fast reconnection process 700 is better configured to take into account the network connection and the R B S timing has changed. The response signal also contains the appropriate sequence of signal points following the conversion sequence. Therefore, after task 704, DPCM may perform task 706 to appropriately transmit the sequence of signal points to APCM. As described above in relation to work 4 1 6, the signal point sequence can be considered as a modified answer tone, for example, the AN Sp cm signal (indicated by code 604 in FIG. 6). The ANSpcm signal 604 can be appropriately formatted to enable APCM to determine or identify the characteristics of the current communication channel or network, especially digital backing and / or other digital impairments. The A N S p c m signal 6 0 4 is also configured to provide a tone suitable for deactivating the network echo canceller and deactivating the network echo suppressor. In a practical embodiment, the AP CM would expect the transmission of the AN Sp cm signal 604. For example, APCM can be configured as a conditional receiver to receive the ANSpcm signal 604 after it sends a reconnection label to DPCM. Therefore, the fast reconnection process 7 0 0 may include a query work 7 8, which preferably determines whether the AN S p cm signal 6 0 4 has been received by the AP CM and / or whether the DP CM has received the AP CM has received the ANS. Appropriate confirmation of p cm signal 6 0 4. If it is not, processing 700 will jump out and the modem system can perform the traditional reconnection routine. If the query work 708 determines that the A NS signal 706 is properly received, then APCM will process the received signal as described above to enable APCM to determine the digital impairments associated with the re-established channel. llllll · — — — — · —-III l · I! β (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)- 48- 499809 Α7 ___ Β7 V. Description of the invention (46) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) It is better to perform work 7 1 0 so that the two modem devices can call back and get the connection with the previous channel For related characteristics and parameters, the previous channel modem connection is placed on the channel before the standby. Task 7 1 0 can cause D P CM to access previous channel information 3 4 2 and AP CM to access previous channel information 3 8 4. As mentioned above, this information may contain one or more of the following parameters: the current channel conditions (as previously determined), any number of settings related to the modem receiver, the characteristics of the communication network, and so on. Task 7 1 0 enables the modem system to quickly retrieve these stored parameters and reset the modem device in an appropriate manner to replace the independent re-evaluation of the channel and the full retraining process. Once the DPCM receives the reconnection identification tag again from the APCM, it can perform work 710, and before the APCM receives the ANSpcm signal 604, the APCM can perform work 7 1 0. If the work 710 is performed by APCM, the APCM equalizer will be initialized according to the previous channel information 3 8 4 so that the AN SP signal m 0 4 can be properly received and analyzed. The DPC printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs can re-synchronize its timing based on a variety of technologies. For example, these technologies can be disclosed by ITU-T Recommendation V. 34 (International Telecommunication Union, September 1994). The traditional V.34 half-duplex main channel synchronization procedure is incorporated herein by reference. In other words, as shown in FIG. 6, the APCM can be configured to transmit the PP signal 6 10 so that the DPCM receiver can restore its timing and carrier synchronization. The S and S \ preamble signals (codes 6 06 and 6 0 8 respectively) can be used to start automatic gain control elements and so on. B 1 signal 6 1 2 can be regarded as the start of DPC Μ -49- This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 499809 Α7 __ Β7 V. Description of invention (47) Scramble Preamble sequences, such as encoders, trellis coders, and so on. These signals and sequences are disclosed in detail in the V · 34 recommendation and will not be described in detail here. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) At the same time, DPCM can send R signal 6 16 and then 11 \ signal 6 1 8 and B 1 signal 6 2 0. These sequences also serve as appropriate preamble sequences to enable APCM to prepare data patterns. These signals and sequences are detailed in the V · 9 Q recommendation and will not be detailed here. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In response to the resynchronization sequence, the modem system will enter the data mode and the system will start transmitting data at the full data rate (Job 7 1 2). In other words, the data transfer mode is re-established without completely terminating the previous connection. The data pattern is represented by the sequences 6 1 4 and 6 2 0 in FIG. 6. Note that unlike the fast start process 4 0 0, the fast reconnection process 7 0 0 does not need to perform a comparison of channel characteristics (see task 4 2 0), initial training procedures (see task 4 2 2), error correction and data compression procedures ( See work 4 2 4), final training procedure (see work 4 2 8), forensic exchange (see work 4 2 8), or exchange of constellation and modem parameters (see work 430). Regarding the PAP / CHAP authentication information, the modem system can be appropriately configured to maintain the P P P / T C P / IP protocol 'during the waiting period so that the P P P authentication information need not be transmitted. As a result, the data system can rebuild its data link without wasting time performing several traditional initialization tasks. In a typical practical system, a fast reconnection process can be used to reconstruct the data pattern in less than 1.5 seconds. Another version of the fast reconnection procedure may use a timing diagram similar to the timing diagram 500 (refer to FIG. 5). However, in this embodiment, several of the above-mentioned signal sections related to the timing chart 500 may be as long as -50. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ) 499809 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. The invention description (48) has been reduced, thereby reducing the traditional reconnection time. For example, since different TRN training sequences and parameter exchange signals do not need to carry basic information, they can be shortened considerably. Because of the actual implementation requirements, you may want to keep the general sequence structure intact in this way (instead of eliminating sections from the timing diagram 500). In fact, from a software implementation point of view, the length of a segment can be adjusted in a fairly straightforward manner, and removing the entire segment from current protocols is a time-consuming and difficult task. Although the reconnection time of this another embodiment is longer than the time described above with reference to the timing chart 600 (for example, reaching 2.5 seconds), it is still longer than the time required to perform the conventional re-initialization procedure. Time is also significantly reduced. As mentioned earlier, when a telephone line is being used for modem connection, the telephone plug-in and related telephone features can be troublesome. The modem connection is usually interrupted in response to a phone call alert, and the modem device does not know the reason for the interruption. Interruption of the warning signal by the telephone may cause the modem device to go offline or enter a lengthy retraining mode. In addition, in many cases, consumers cannot take advantage of telephone plug-in services. Generally speaking, the present invention solves this problem in the following ways: (1) Allow any modem device to request an immediate call in response to a call-insertion alert; (2) Allow the first modem device to request the second modem device to enter waiting And allowing the second modem device to accept or reject the request; and (3) allowing either party's modem device to request a fast reconnection procedure (as described above). With this signaling technology, the modem connection can be terminated, put on hold, or quickly reconnected in response to an alert signal such as a phone call alert. Similarly, if the modem connection is placed in waiting, after the waiting period, the same signaling mechanism can be used to reconnect the number (please read the note on the back of the S before filling out this page)-Order --- ------ Line-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -51-499809 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (49) The time slot of the machine. If the two-terminal device (for example, DPCM and APCM in the V.90 system) is compatible with the modem waiting characteristics, an appropriate signaling design is used to enable the end-device to switch the operation mode when needed. Although the case where the AP CM is on the client side and the d P CM is on the server or the central side of the modem system is described here, the communication design and the different processes are described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the technology described here can be equivalently applied in the case of communication activities between two customer modem devices or in the case of a V · 34 modem system. Figure 16 is a schematic illustration of an example environment in which the 6 Series modem system 600 can operate. The modem system 1 6 0 0 usually includes a first modem device 1602 and a second modem device 16 0 4. The first modem device 1 6 0 2 is related to the central side, and the second modem device 1 6 0 4 1 6 7 0 on the customer side. In a typical V · 90 system, the first modem device 1620 may be a DP CM, and the second modem device 16 04 may be an APCM. D P C M 1 600 is coupled to the central office 1606 via a digital link, and APCM 1604 is coupled to the central office 1 06 via an analog link such as a local loop. It should be understood that the computer system 1600 may include additional components and functions related to the quick start routines and / or quick reconnection procedures described above. Figure 16 also shows the calling device 16 0 8 (which can place the incoming call on the client side), the parallel answering device 16 i 0 on the client side, and the serial answering device 16 1 1 on the client side. As shown in Figure 16, the parallel answering device 16 1 0 will be connected in such a way that it conforms to the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) in parallel with the paper size. (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again)-Order --------- Line · Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 499809 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (50) APC Μ 1 6 0 4 receives the same call. In contrast, the serial answering device 16 1 1 will be connected to APCM 1 604 to pass the call to it; A P c M 16 0 4 will control or adjust the call traffic to or from the serial answering device 1611 in a conventional manner. A call is established between the calling device 1608 and the answering device 1610 and 1611 via the central office 1606, and a modem connection is established between the DP 1601 and the APCM 1604 via the central office 1606. In general, modem systems can be configured to support a signaling mechanism that responds to phone calls and other situations that may require disconnecting the modem. For example, APCM 1604 can send a properly formatted signal to activate the modem waiting state, DPC M 1 600 can send a different signal to confirm the modem waiting for a request, and APC M 1604 can send another signal to request a fast The reconnection procedure (as described above) is initiated and either modem device can transmit a signal representing the end-of-session request. For the sake of brevity, Figure 16 illustrates the APCM 1604 and DPCM 1602 in a process-related manner as exemplified herein. In a practical embodiment, each modem device can be used as a transmitting or receiving modem, and each modem device can generate a different signal as described herein. The DPCM 1602 includes a transmitter area 1612 and a receiver area 1 6 1 4, both of which can be configured according to conventional techniques and according to the description of the modem system 300 (see FIG. 3). DPCM 1 6 0 2 can apply Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) in the initial process, data mode, waiting mode, and transmission of this paper size (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page )-ϋ ϋ nnnn I: eJ n > 1 nn ϋ I ϋ I · Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy -53- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy A7 -----_ V. DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION During the (51) mode, a signal sheet μ ^ a ^ L 'sequence and tone are transmitted. As mentioned above, the DPC M 1 6 2 can be configured to transmit the appropriate conversion sequence 1616 and the characteristic signal point sequence associated with the quick start routine or the fast reconnection procedure (for example, AN spcm signal (6 丄 8)) 1 1. During the shell material mode, DpcM 1602 will transmit data according to the appropriate data transmission design 1620. DPCM 1 602 can also be transmitted and can be received by apcM 1 64 0 and / or central office 16 6 Some signals, for example, as described here, DP CM i 6 〇2 can transmit "A" tone § week 1 6 2 and "B" tone 丄 6 2 4. In a practical embodiment, the "A" alfalfa 1δ22 is a 2400Hz tone, and the "β" is the first 1624 series 1 20 Ηζ tone (as disclosed in I TU-T recommendation V · 34). Of course, the modem device can generate and process any appropriate tone or signal to replace (or add) these predetermined tones. The DPCM 1 600 is also configured to transmit some additional signals related to the initialization of the modem standby mode, the reconnection of the modem period after the waiting period, and the termination of the modem connection. For example, DPC M 1 6 0 2 can transmit a modem waiting request 1 6 2 6, a modem waiting for confirmation 1 6 2 8, a fast reconnect request 1 6 3 0, and an interrupt signal 1 6 3 2 (herein referred to as "Modem Status Signal"). The format and function of these signals will be explained in more detail below. DPCM 1 6 0 2 also includes a signal detection element 16 3 4 which can use any conventional technique to detect, analyze, and interpret APC M 1 6 0 4 and / or central office 1 6 6 Control signal, please apply this paper size to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -54-I --- I Γ! I --- · I --- r --- Order ·! ------ Line · (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 B7 V. Inventive Note Pull) and tones. For example, the signal detection element 1 6 3 4 may utilize a conventional tone detector and / or a conventional V · 3 4 or V · 9 0 differential that is configured to detect and distinguish the different signals described herein. Phase shift key (DPSK) receiver. As the signaling design described here, the APCM 1604 is preferably configured in a manner similar to D PC C 1602. In other words, APCM 1604 is capable of transmitting "A" tone 1642, "B" tone 1644, modem waiting request 1646, modem waiting for confirmation 1 6 4 8, fast reconnect request 1650, and interrupt signal 1652. In addition, the APCM 1604 can be configured to generate a caller ID tone 1654 to notify the central office 1606 that the client supports the caller ID feature (as described by the caller ID unit 1 6 5 6). According to current standards, the incoming ID tone 1 6 5 4 is a DTMF "D" tone with a length of about 55-65 milliseconds. Of course, APCM 16 0 4 will transmit data 16 8 during the data mode. As described in the above description of DP CM 1 6 0 2, APCM 1 6 0 4 preferably includes a signal detection element 16 6 0 which enables APC M 1 6 0 4 to receive, detect, and analyze Different signaling tones and sequences transmitted by DPC M 1 600. In this way, the APCM 1604 and DPCM 1602 can receive signals and can switch the operation mode in response to specific signals or received signals. The central office 1660 will be traditionally configured to perform circuit switching related to modems, voice, and fax telephones. Central area 1 6 0 6 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -55 _ ΙΓ ---- ^ ------- ----- r- --Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 ____B7 V. Description of Invention (53) Any number of The client-side and central office 160 can be operatively coupled to any number of other central offices, central-side modems, and so on. As briefly described above, the APCM 1604, the answering device 1610, and the caller ID component 1 6 5 6 may be located on the customer side 16 7 0. Therefore, the APCM 1604, the answering device 1610, and the caller ID component 1656 are all supported by the central office 1606. The central area 16 0 6 contains the appropriate switching structure 16 2 to route calls between the appropriate parties. For example, the switching structure 1 6 72 can be switched to the first state to establish a modem connection between DPCM 1 6 0 2 and AP CM 1 6 0 4 and switched to the second state to call the device 1 6 0 8 and A voice connection is established between the answering devices 1610. In addition, the switching structure 1 6 7 2 can temporarily interrupt the connection to transmit the control signal, data, or tone to the current circuit or office line. At this point, the central area 16 0 6 may transmit some ringing signals 1 6 7 4, warning signals 1 6 7 6, caller ID data 1 6 7 8, and other information according to specific situations. For example, according to the current method ', the central office 1660 can temporarily interrupt the voice call and send a call interruption signal 1676 to the client 1670. If the customer receives an incoming call ’, the switching structure 1 6 7 2 will be reconfigured to arrange the incoming call to the customer 1 6 6 and the original call will be placed in a waiting state. As detailed below, a similar route is used to put the modem call on hold. As mentioned earlier, the messaging design preferably uses Phase 2 messaging, which is also performed by traditional V · 3 4 and V · 9 0 Used by modem systems. In addition, the transmission design uses DPSK transmission technology, which allows transmission in a seamless manner J ------------ r—tr --------- line (please read the back Note? Please fill in this page again.) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 56- 499809 A7 factory — ___B7___ 5. Description of the invention (54) and v · 3 4 and V · 9 0 retraining program integration. The signals are configured so that they can be detected by a V · 34 / V · 90 DPSK receiver or a fairly simple tone detector. In an actual embodiment, the modem waits for a request, the modem waits for confirmation, a fast reconnect request, and the interruption signal will lead tone A or tone B for a period of time (for example, at least 50 milliseconds). This technology balances the use of the A and B tones used in traditional V · 34 and V · 90 modem systems with the modulation design already used by modem systems. Therefore, since D P C M 1 600 is typically conditional to receive the D P S K signal, the signaling design is easy to implement. The modem-mounted signal following the A or B tone is preferably transmitted as a D P S K signal based on the repeated bit pattern. In a preferred embodiment, the modem status signal is a DPSK signal related to eight repeated four-bit patterns, where different patterns correspond to different modem status signals. It is desirable to use a four-bit pattern so that simple tone detectors can be used for the signal detection elements 1634 and 1660; shorter bit patterns result in fewer frequency components related to the .DPSK signal. As a result, the signal detection design does not need to be ordered --------- line call. (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's Consumer Cooperatives printed no more than 3 forms . The following formula is often displayed in the display of the miscellaneous sample complex content of the content of the spectrum of the frequency of the frequency of the frequency of the frequency of the quantitative state of the large machine analysis of the same scores used. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) 499809 A7 ----- B7 V. Description of the invention (55) Modem status signal Abbreviation DPSK style interrupt signal DC 0101 __ Request MΗ 0011 The modem waits for confirmation MΗΑ 0001 Quick reconnect request QPR Oil 1 Table 3-Data machine status signal Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Employee Consumer Cooperative Printed It is better to select a specific bit pattern so that the resulting DPSK signal can Different from DPSK signals that are "reserved" for other data communication protocol situations. For example, a D P S K pattern that is all 0 is equal to an A or B tone, and a DP SK pattern that is all 1 is equal to a V · 3 4 I N F 0 M A R K signal. In addition, special bit patterns can be selected appropriately so that the resulting DPSK signal is easily detected by the tone detector. For the example bit pattern shown in Table 3, the modem status signal will have the frequency content listed in Tables 4 and 5 below, where the frequency is in hertz and X is greater than the threshold level The spectrum content, and the dashed lines represent the spectrum content below the threshold. For the example D P S K bit pattern shown in Table 3, the lower spectral energy component is at least 8 d B lower than the higher spectral energy component of the same frequency. As a result, even if some common frequency components exist, different modem status signals can still be distinguished. (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -58-Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (56) ---- ~ 900 975 1050 1125 1200 1275 1350 1425 1500 DC XX μη XXXXX ΜΗα XX ORR X 晦 X 袠 4-Frequency component (APC Μ) for the status signal of the modem ---- 2100 2175 2250 2325 2400 2475 2550 2625 2700 DC XX ΜΗ XXXXX ΜΗΑ XX QRR X __ __ X Table 5-Frequency components (DPC Μ) for modem status signals (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)-Order --------- The different frequency ranges used by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs to print AP CM and DP CM are related to the illustrated application of two modem devices using different carriers. For example, in a conventional V · 90 system, D PCM uses a signal (tone B and DPSK carrier) close to 2 400Hz, while APPC uses a signal close to 12 00 Η z. This feature is derived from the traditional V. 3 4 design. In this design, the calling modem uses a signal close to 1 2 0 0 Η ζ and the answering modem uses a signal close to 2 4 0 OH ζ. As a result, the second spectrum frequency pattern will be the same, but the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) will be applied at 1 200 Hz and this paper scale. 2. Description of the invention (57) 2 4 〇〇 z offset. This method ensures that the end device can properly detect the signal even when the two ends are transmitting the same type of signal. In actual systems, modem status signal detection does not need to detect the entire "spectral fingerprint" of a given signal. The signal detection elements 1634 and 1660 are configured to match and detect and analyze different numbers of frequency components. For example, as shown in Table 4, if the signal contains relatively high spectrum energy at 1050Hz and 1350Hz, the signal can be an interrupt signal or a modem waiting for a request. Therefore, the signal detection routine will continue to analyze the signal and make an appropriate decision for the spectral content of 900Hz, 1200Hz, and / or 1500 Η z. Fig. 8 is a timing chart showing a situation in which the modem connection is interrupted by a phone call and the modem connection is put on hold when the incoming call is answered by the client. Whether the client side 1670 uses a parallel answering device 1610 or a series answering device 1611, FIG. 8 can be applied. Signals, sequences, tones, commands, etc. are shown to be related to APCM, DPCM, and the central office (the central office can be related to the AP CM by a signal and the DP CM by a signal). For the sake of convenience, the processing related to FIG. 8 will be described here in the case of the modem system 1600. During the data mode, the central office 160 will temporarily disconnect the modem and send a warning signal 802 to the APCM 1604. The warning signal can be a conventional telephone plug-in warning and it contains human audible components (for example, audio tones) and components that can be detected by communication devices or machinery. According to most of the telephone interruption agreements, the warning signal components will be serially based on the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). ------------ I --- --- ^-II ^ --- IIIII-(Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 499809 A7 __ _B7 ____ V. Description of the invention (58) Transmission. In response to the alert signal 802, the APCM 1604 will send a DTMF tone 8 0 4 to request the caller ID information from the central office. As mentioned above, the first § week 804 may be a short burst of DTMF "D" tones having a duration of about 55-65 milliseconds. Assuming that the central office i606 receives and recognizes the D T M F tone 8 0 4, it will format the incoming call data 8 0 5 and transmit it to the customer side 16 7 0. As shown in FIG. 16, the caller ID data 805 (represented by the code 1 6 7 8 in FIG. 16) is received and processed in an appropriate manner to be displayed or analyzed by the caller ID component. In response to the central office 1 606 cutting APCM 1 604 away, the DPCM will begin the retraining process by transmitting an appropriate signal such as a "B" tone 8 06. In practical applications, when the incoming call ID request 804 and the incoming call ID data 805 are being received, processed, and transmitted by the central office 1606, the "B" tone 806 is usually transmitted. When DPCM 1602 waits for APCM 1604 to reply with "A" tone 8 0, "B" tone 8 6 will be transmitted continuously. If APCM 1604 receives "B" tone 806 from DPCM 1604, it will transmit "A" clef 808. As mentioned above, the "A" tone 8 0 8 is preferably transmitted for at least a minimum duration (for example, 50 milliseconds) to give the DPCM 162 a chance to receive it. If D P C M 1 600 does not receive the "A" tone 8 0 8 within a certain period of time, it will eventually interrupt itself. If the user of APCM 1 604 wishes to answer the incoming call, the modem will wait for the request 8 1 0 after the "A" tone 8 0 8 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Order ----- ----- Line · Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 regulations (210 X 297 mm 1 ~ qU ~ " 499809 A7B7 59) is transmitted. The modem waits for a request 8 1 0 is automatically provided by the stomach-fitting device at the client side 1670 or is prompted to respond to a user command. The modem waits for a request 8 10 can be formatted as described above, It will preferably be transmitted for at least a minimum period of time. In a practical embodiment, the modem waiting for a request 8 10 will be transmitted for about 53 milliseconds (all modem status signals described herein may have similar minimum Duration). Unlike traditional V · 34 or V · 90 modem systems, when the DPCM 1602 receives an "A" tone of 8 0 8, no real retraining procedure is performed. However, in order to respond to the modem, it waits for a request 8 1 〇, DPC Μ 1 6 0 2 will send modem to wait for confirmation Recognize 8 1 2 for a minimum period of time, for example, about 53 milliseconds. After the DPC M 1 600 2 modem waits for confirmation 8 1 2 'When it remains in the waiting state, it will preferably continue to transmit "B ”Tone 8 0 6. In response to the modem waiting for confirmation 8 1 2, APC M 1 6 0 4 will generate an appropriate flashing signal 8 1 4 to instruct the central office 1 6 0 6 to disconnect from the modem connection and the incoming call 8 16 cut in. In addition, the phone (or other appropriate answering device) will close the incoming call; the APCM 1604 can be configured to arrange incoming signals to the parallel answering device 1 6 1 0 or the answering device in series in an appropriate manner. 1 6 1 1. In addition, when the mobile phone is connected (during the period 8 1 8), the APC Μ 16 0 4 can be placed in an idle or "handset-on" state. Therefore, the client side at 16 7 0 The user can make an incoming call 816 while the DPCM 1602 remains waiting. The modem connection can be re-established by the fast modem reconnection procedure (described below). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)-Order --------- Line · Staff of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs The paper size printed by Fei Cooperative is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -62-499809 A7 B7_; ___ 5. Description of the invention (60) Figure 9 is a timing chart illustrating DP CM 1 6 0 2 Reconnect to respond to incoming call termination. The processing shown in FIG. 9 assumes: (1) the DPCM 1602 series is in a waiting state; (2) the answering device 1610 series is connected in parallel with the APCM 1604; and (3) the answering device 16 10 terminates the incoming call, for example, Before the calling device 16 0 8 is placed on the "handset", the answering device 16 1 0 is placed on the "handset". To illustrate this point, parallel means that APCM 164 and answering device 1610 will receive the same signal from central office 1606 in a simultaneous manner. In response to the termination of an incoming call, the central office 1660 will detect "hang up" in the traditional way, for example, using the conventional office line detection technology. Finally, Central Office 1 606 disconnects or interrupts the incoming call, switches to DPCM 1602, and generates appropriate signals such as ringing signal 902. The ringing signal 9 0 2 is used to alert the user that the original call at 16 70 is still waiting and ready to connect. In response to the ringing signal 902, the APCM 1604 will be placed in the "pick up handset" so that it can receive the signal again from the central area 1660. Therefore, the ringing signal 902 informs AP MC 604, the incoming call has ended, and / or AP PC M 604 can continue the modem reconnection procedure. As described above with reference to FIG. 8, APCM 1 60 04 generates an “A” tone 9 0 4 (at least 50 milliseconds) in response to the detection of a “B” tone 9 0 6. After the "A" tone 904, APCM 604 sends a quick reconnect request 9 0 8 to start the fast reconnect procedure (as described above in the case of Figs. 6 and 7). Therefore, I ’m back (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page). !! Line, printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -63- 499809 A7 _. ———... B7 V. Description of the Invention (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) You should quickly reconnect to request the detection of 9 0, DPC Μ 1 6 0 2 preferably sends the QTS signal 9 1 0, and the ANS pcm sequence 9 1 2 follows . The characteristics, format, and functions of the Q T S signal 9 10 are as described above. If both modem devices support the above-mentioned fast reconnect feature, the waiting modem connection can be re-established in a relatively short period of time. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Figure 10 is a sequence diagram illustrating the situation where the incoming call was terminated before the parallel answering device 16 1 0 was placed under the "drop microphone". In this case, when the incoming call is terminated by the calling device 16 0 8, the central office 16 6 will reconnect the client side 16 7 0 to the original call (in this embodiment, the modem connection) ). As a result, the "B" tone transmitted by D PC C 1602 is again available at AP CM 1604. Regardless of whether APCM 1 6 04 is currently in the state of "lifting the handset" or "hanging up the handset", it will better detect whether the DPCM 602 is reconnected. It should be understood that APCM 1 604 may employ any number of conventional techniques (depending on the particular embodiment) to detect reconnections. For example, DPC M 1 600 can detect the "B" tone from DPCM 1602, which can automatically respond after a predetermined pause time, or use the technology of the office line to sense the termination of an incoming call . Once the two modem devices have regained communication with each other, the fast reconnection routine will proceed as described above with reference to FIG. 9. Regarding the situation shown in Fig. 10, it may be necessary to make APCM 1640 respond within a certain period of time to ensure that the central office 1606 does not regard the reconnection attempt as a flashing or interrupted microphone. For example, in the preferred embodiment, APCM 1 604 is configured to respond in 200 milliseconds. -64- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 499809 A7

五、發明說明(62 ) 入的通話之終止,以致於中央局1 6 0 6不會將延遲視爲 會議通話請求(其可能造成DP CM 1 6 0 2被置於等 待)或中斷(其可能造成連接終止)。可根據諸如貝爾核 心技術參考 G R — 5 0 6 — C 〇 R E ( BELL CORE Technical Reference GR-506-C ORE )(與一般通訊發訊有關 )及貝爾核心技術參考TR - NWT - 〇 〇 〇 5 7 5等任 何適當的電信建議、標準、或操作協定,選取特定的時間 長度。這些參考的內容於此倂入參考。 一般而言,使用並聯回答裝置1 6 1 〇之系統的情形 中所使用的任何程序也可用於使用串聯回答裝置1 6 1 1 之系統的情形。但是,反之未必爲真。舉例而言,圖1 1 係時序圖,顯不進入的通話由串聯回答裝置1 6 1 1終止 的情形。如上所述,在客戶側1 6 7 0處的通訊局線起先 提供APCM 1604來自中央局1606之訊號,且 APCM 1604會將訊號安排至回答裝置16 10。 在大部份的實際應用中,即使A P C Μ 1 6 0 4僅將通 話安排至串聯回答裝置1 6 1 1時,其仍會維持「掛上聽 筒」。因此,A P C Μ 1 6 0 4能夠監視局視以偵測「 Β」音調或是與DPCM 1 6 0 2相關的適當訊號是否 存在。在此情形中,假使進入的通話終止時(由呼叫裝置 1 6 0 8或由串聯回答裝置1 6 1 1終止),則A P C Μ 1 6 0 4能夠從中央局1 6 0 6接收訊號。此外,中央 局1606會藉由切換DPCM 1602與客戶側 1 6 7 0通訊以回應通話終止之偵測。因此’假使由 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - ----1---訂---------線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -65- 499809 A7 __ B7 五、發明說明(63 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A P C Μ 1 6 Ο 4偵測到「Β」音調時,其能立即地與 串聯回答裝置1 6 1 1解耦合。一旦二數據機裝置重新取 得通訊活動,則快速再連接常式會如同參考圖9之上述說 明所述般地進行。 圖1 2係時序圖’說明D P C Μ 1 6 〇 2以話終指 令回應數據機等待請求之情形(圖1 2可應用至使用串聯 回答裝置16 11或是並聯回答裝置16 10之系統)。 直至數據機等待請求1 2 0 2從AP CM 1 6 0 4傳送 至DP CM 1 6 0 2爲止,處理均類似於參考圖8之上 述說明。與D P C Μ 1 6 0 2確認數據機等待請求 1 2 0 2之情形不同,圖1 2中所示之情形需要從 DPCM 1602傳送中斷訊號1204。DPCM 1 6 0 2可在想到或考慮諸如目前通話流量、D P C Μ 1 6 0 2的功能能力、頻道特性等任何數目的操作參數 之後,才傳送中斷訊號1 2 0 4。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在DPCM 1602傳送中斷訊號1204之後, 其會閒置或等待而不傳送任何有意義的訊號。爲回應中斷 訊號1204,APCM 1604會以適當方式終止數 據機連接之通話。假使中央局1 6 0 6在諸如1 5 5 0毫 秒之適當的暫停時段之後仍未偵測到來自A P C Μ 1 6 04之活動,則其可假定APCM 1 6 04已被中 斷。之後,中央局1606會切離DPCM 1602及 產生振鈴訊號1 2 0 6和來電I D資料1 2 0 8給客戶 1 6 7 0,以致於可回答進入的通話。在諸如二秒等適當 本紐尺度適用中關家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)72 " 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(64 ) 的暫停時間之後,D P C Μ 1 6 0 2可使其數據連接終 止通話,在暫停時間期間,D P C Μ 1 6 0 2未從 APCM 1 604收到訊號。因此,一旦中央局 1 6 0 6開始產生振鈴訊號1 2 0 6時,D P C Μ 1 6 0 4典型上會停止通話。如上所述,在停止通話之前 ,APCM 1604及/或DPCM 1602會儲存 任何相關的操作參數以便於後續連接之快速啓動。 在某些條件之下,終端使用者會希望立即地終止數據 機連接及接受進入的通話。圖1 3係時序圖,顯示爲回應 警示訊號1302,APCM 1604會傳送中斷訊號 1 3 0 4而非數據機等待請求之情形。圖1 3可應用至使 用串聯回答裝置1 6 1 1或是並聯回答裝置1 6 1 〇之系 統。APCM 1 604會產生中斷訊號1 304以回應 使用者命令,或是自動地依據預定的協定或設定。與圖 1 3有關的訊號及操作之進行實際上類似於與圖1 2有關 之進行。但是,與圖1 2中所示的處理不同,AP CM 1 6 04會傳送中斷訊號1 3 04給DPCM 1 6 0 2° 圖14係時序圖,顯示爲回應警示訊號140 1, APCM 1 6 0 4促成快速再連接程序及忽略進入的通 話之情形。圖1 4可應用至使用串聯回答裝置1 6 1 1或 並聯回合裝置1 6 1 0之系統。當終端使用者不要被進入 的通話打擾時,及/或假使數據機連接被警示訊號 1 4 0 1嚴重地影響時,則當數據機連接的品質重要時, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)V. Description of the Invention (62) The termination of the incoming call, so that the Central Office 16 0 6 will not consider the delay as a conference call request (which may cause DP CM 1 6 0 2 to be placed on hold) or interrupted (which may Cause the connection to terminate). According to Bell Core Technology Reference GR — 5 06 — C ORE (BELL CORE Technical Reference GR-506-C ORE) (related to general communications and communications) and Bell Core Technology Reference TR-NWT-〇〇〇5 7 5 Select any appropriate telecommunications recommendation, standard, or operating agreement, and select a specific length of time. The contents of these references are incorporated herein by reference. In general, any program used in the case of a system using a parallel answering device 16 1 0 can also be used in the case of a system using a serial answering device 16 1 1. However, the opposite is not necessarily true. For example, FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram showing a situation in which an incoming call is terminated by the serial answering device 16 1 1. As mentioned above, the communication office line at the client side 1670 first provides the signal from the central office 1606 to the APCM 1604, and the APCM 1604 will arrange the signal to the answering device 1610. In most practical applications, even if APCM 1660 only schedules the call to the tandem answering device 1611, it will still “hang up the handset”. Therefore, APCM 604 can monitor the local video to detect the presence of the "B" tone or the appropriate signal related to DPCM 1602. In this case, if the incoming call is terminated (by the calling device 16 0 8 or by the tandem answering device 16 1 1), APCM 604 can receive a signal from the central office 16 06. In addition, the central office 1606 will respond to the detection of call termination by switching DPCM 1602 to communicate with the client side 670. Therefore, 'If you want to (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)-------Order --------- line Standards apply to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) -65- 499809 A7 __ B7 V. Description of invention (63) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) APC Μ 1 6 Ο 4 When a "B" tone is detected, it can be immediately decoupled from the tandem answering device 16 1 1. Once the two modem devices have regained communication activity, the fast reconnection routine will proceed as described with reference to the above description of FIG. Fig. 12 is a sequence diagram 'illustrating the situation in which D PC C 1620 responds to a modem waiting for a request with a call end command (Fig. 12 can be applied to a system using a serial answering device 16 11 or a parallel answering device 16 10). Until the modem waits for the request 1 2 0 2 to be transmitted from the AP CM 1 6 0 4 to the DP CM 1 6 0 2, the processing is similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 8. Unlike the case where the DPCM confirms the modem waiting for the request 1 2 0 2, the situation shown in FIG. 12 requires the interrupt signal 1204 to be transmitted from the DPCM 1602. The DPCM 1 600 can transmit the interrupt signal 1 2 0 4 after considering or considering any number of operating parameters such as the current call flow, the functional capabilities of the DPCM 1 600, channel characteristics, and the like. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs After DPCM 1602 transmits the interrupt signal 1204, it will be idle or waiting without transmitting any meaningful signal. In response to the interrupt signal 1204, the APCM 1604 will terminate the call connected to the computer in an appropriate manner. If the Central Office 16 0 6 has not detected activity from the AP C M 16 04 after an appropriate pause period such as 1550 milliseconds, it may assume that the APCM 16 04 has been interrupted. After that, the central office 1606 will switch off the DPCM 1602 and generate a ringing signal 1 2 06 and an incoming ID data 1 2 8 to the customer 1 67, so that the incoming call can be answered. After applying the appropriate standard such as two seconds to the Zhongguanjia Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 72 " 499809 A7 B7 5. After the pause time of the invention description (64), DPC Μ 1 6 0 2 The data connection can be terminated by the data connection. During the pause time, the DPC M 1 600 has not received a signal from APCM 1 604. Therefore, once the central office 1660 starts to generate the ringing signal 1206, the DPCM 1600 will typically stop talking. As mentioned above, before stopping the call, the APCM 1604 and / or DPCM 1602 will store any relevant operating parameters to facilitate the quick start of subsequent connections. Under certain conditions, the end user may wish to immediately terminate the modem connection and accept incoming calls. Figure 13 is a sequence diagram showing the response to the alarm signal 1302. The APCM 1604 will send the interrupt signal 1 3 0 4 instead of the modem waiting for the request. Fig. 13 can be applied to a system using a serial answering device 16 1 1 or a parallel answering device 16 1 0. APCM 1 604 generates interrupt signal 1 304 in response to a user command, or automatically according to a predetermined protocol or setting. The signals and operations related to FIG. 13 are actually similar to those performed in connection with FIG. 12. However, unlike the processing shown in Figure 12, AP CM 1 6 04 will send an interrupt signal 1 3 04 to DPCM 1 6 0 2 ° Figure 14 is a timing diagram shown as a response to the warning signal 140 1, APCM 1 6 0 4 Facilitate quick reconnect procedures and ignore incoming calls. Figure 14 can be applied to a system using a series answer device 16 1 1 or a parallel round device 16 1 0. When the end user is not to be disturbed by the incoming call, and / or if the modem connection is seriously affected by the warning signal 1 4 0 1, when the quality of the modem connection is important, this paper standard applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS ) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

I 訂---------線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 厂 B7 五、發明說明(65 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 此情形會發生。此外,此情形可能發生以回應來電I D資 料’亦即,回答方可以選擇忽略來自某些呼叫方之進入的 通話。直到「A」音調1 4 0 2被傳送之點爲止,圖1 4 的程序類似於圖8的程序。在「A」音調1 4 0 2傳送之 後,APCM 1 604會產生快速再連接請求1 404 ’快速再連接請求1404最終會由DPCM 1602 接收。爲回應快速再連接請求1 4 0 4,D P C Μ 1602會傳送QTS訊號1406,ANSpcm訊號 1 4 0 8接在其後,以便於快速再連接常式(如同參考圖 6及7之上述所述般)。應注意,APCM 1604或 者可傳送諸如相位反轉等適當的數據機狀態訊號,數據機 狀態訊號係標示完全的再訓練程序而非快速再連接程序。 在此實施例中,再訓練程序會以傳統方式進行。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在某些條件下,DPCM 1602不會「自動地」 進入初始再訓練模式以回應警示訊號。換言之,D P C Μ 1 6 0 2會宛如未發生間斷般,繼續傳送資料。圖1 5 係說明此情形之時序圖(圖1 5可應用至使用串列回答裝 置16 11或並聯回答裝置16 10之系統)。如同參考 圖8之上述說明般,APCM 1 6 04會於資料模式中 的間斷期間傳送D T M F「D」音調1 5 0 4 (與來電顯 示請求有關),以回應警示訊號1 5 0 2。與圖8的情形 不同,D P C Μ 1 6 0 2因間斷結果而開始傳送「Β」 音調。D P C Μ 1 6 0 2繼續傳送資料1 5 0 6給 APCM 1604。當APCM 1604由中央局 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱1 ^8 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 Α7 五、發明說明(66 ) 1 6 〇6再連接時,其較佳地傳送「A」音調1 508 — 段適當的時間以允許D P C Μ 1 6 0 2以「Β」音調 1 5 1 〇回應。當a p c Μ 1 6 0 4偵測到來自 DpCM 1602之「B」音調時,其接著以 S 1 G N A L a 1512跟隨在「A」音調1508之後 ’其中S I GNALa 1 5 1 2可爲數據機等待請求、快 速再連接請求、或中斷訊號。爲回應SIGNALa 1512,DPCM 1602 會傳送 SIGNALd 1 5 1 4,其中S I GNALd可爲數據機等待確認、 Q T S訊號及A N S p c m序列跟隨在後之短時間靜音、 或是中斷訊號。以此方式,即使D P C Μ 1 6 0 2未能 隨著「Β」音調的傳送而初始地進入再訓練模式,仍可處 理上述不同的情形。 參考圖8 — 1 6之上述發訊常式及程序可等效地應用 於容納始於客戶側1 6 7 0之不同請求。舉例而言, A P C Μ 1 6 0 4的使用者可希望將目前的數據機連接 置於等待、促使快速再連接、或是以獨立方式促使完全再 訓練。在一實際的實施例中,數據機等待請求及數據機等 待確認訊號可倂入傳統的Phase 4 CP及Μ Ρ序列。因此, 假使數據機裝置要將其它數據機裝置置於等待(舉例而言 ,三方通話),則請求數據機裝置可執行速率重協商及以 適當方式傳送等待訊號。能以類似於傳統的V · 3 4及 V · 9 0終話程序,執行此技術,其中特別碼(資料速率 二0 )用以標示終話。但是,數據機發訊技術可利用不同 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -69 - -, Γ 0 ^1 ϋ ϋ 1 ϋ· n ϋ 0 1· I I I ϋ ϋ 1,J 1 1 n - (請先閱讀背面之注音w事項再填寫本頁) 499809 Α7 ----------- Β7 五、發明說明(67 ) 的位元復合或是使一些保留的位元平衡。 爲回應此使用者請求,APCM 1 6 04會產生適 當的數據狀態訊號(舉例而言,數據機等待請求、快速再 連接請求、等等)接在其後之「A」音調,以由D P C Μ 1602接收。如同參考圖15之上述所述般, D P C Μ 1 6 0 2接著以適當的狀態訊號回覆跟隨在後 之「Β」音調回應(舉例而言,數據機等待確認、Q T S 訊號、等等)。以此方式,本發明的技術可應用於電話插 播警示、局線間斷、或局線損壞事件相關之任何情形。 在一實施例中,本發明提供減少一般與V · 9 0數據 機系統相關的初始化時間及再連接時間之技術。快速啓動 及快速再連接技術會使先前連接的已知頻道特性平衡以降 低後續嘗試建立相同的連接有關之訓練時間。雖然不限於 任何特定數據機應用,但是,可使用快速啓動程序以免除 諸如5 6 k b p s數據機一般採用的初始化協定或處理 的部份,舉例而言,V . 8 b i s、V · 8數位損傷學習 、初始訓練、探索和測距、等等。此外,相較於傳統的數 據機啓動技術,快速啓動技術可在不同時間或以不同的次 序執行某些操作。 再回頭參考圖5,其顯示在V · 9 0訓練處理的階段 4期間,AP CM數據機5 9 0及DPCM數據機5 8 0 會分別經由C P和Μ P框5 1 0和5 2 0,交換不同的參 數。圖1 7顯示可包含於範例Μ Ρ序列或框1 7 0 0中之 不同位元的資訊及參數。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) # ----;--II 訂·--------· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -70- 499809Order I --------- Line · Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 499809 A7 Factory B7 V. Invention Description (65) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This situation will occur. Furthermore, this situation may occur in response to incoming call ID data, i.e. the answering party may choose to ignore incoming calls from certain callers. Up to the point where the "A" tone 1 2 0 2 is transmitted, the procedure of FIG. 14 is similar to the procedure of FIG. 8. After the “A” tone 1 2 0 2 is transmitted, APCM 1 604 will generate a fast reconnection request 1 404 ′ The fast reconnection request 1404 will eventually be received by DPCM 1602. In response to the fast reconnect request 1 4 0 4, the DPC M 1602 will send a QTS signal 1406, followed by the ANSpcm signal 1 4 0 8 to facilitate the fast reconnection routine (as described above with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7). ). It should be noted that the APCM 1604 may also transmit appropriate modem status signals such as phase reversal. The modem status signals indicate a complete retraining procedure rather than a fast reconnection procedure. In this embodiment, the retraining process is performed in a conventional manner. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Under certain conditions, the DPCM 1602 will not "automatically" enter the initial retraining mode in response to a warning signal. In other words, D P C M 1 600 will continue to transmit data as if no interruption occurred. Fig. 15 is a timing diagram illustrating this situation (Fig. 15 can be applied to a system using a serial answering device 16 11 or a parallel answering device 16 10). As described above with reference to FIG. 8, APCM 1 64 will transmit a D T M F “D” tone 1 5 0 4 (related to the caller display request) during the discontinuity in the data mode in response to the alert signal 1 5 0 2. Unlike the case of FIG. 8, D P C M 1620 starts transmitting the "B" tone due to the intermittent result. D PC C 1620 continues to send data 1506 to APCM 1604. When APCM 1604 is printed by the Central Bureau of the People ’s Republic of China, the paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 Public Love 1 ^ 8-printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 Α7 V. Description of the invention (66) 1 6 〇 6 When reconnected, it preferably transmits "A" tone 1 508 — a suitable period of time to allow the DPC M 1 6 0 2 to respond with a "B" tone 1 5 1 0. When apc M 1 6 0 4 detects When the "B" tone from DpCM 1602 is followed by the "A" tone 1508 with S 1 GNAL a 1512, where SI GNALa 1 5 1 2 can be a modem waiting request, fast reconnect request, or interrupt signal. In response to SIGNALa 1512, DPCM 1602 will send SIGNALd 1 5 1 4 where SI GNALd can wait for the modem to confirm, QTS signal and ANS pcm sequence followed by a short silence, or interrupt signal. In this way, even DPC Μ 1 602 fails to enter the retraining mode initially with the transmission of the "B" tone, and can still handle the different situations mentioned above. The above-mentioned signaling routines and procedures with reference to Figure 8-16 can be applied equivalently Beginning with accommodation 1 6 Different requests from 70. For example, users of APC M 1 64 may wish to put the current modem connection on hold, prompt fast reconnection, or cause full retraining in an independent manner. In a practical In the embodiment, the modem waiting request and the modem waiting confirmation signal can be input into the traditional Phase 4 CP and MP sequence. Therefore, if the modem device is to wait for other modem devices (for example, a three-way call) , Request the modem device to perform rate renegotiation and transmit waiting signals in an appropriate manner. This technology can be executed in a similar end-to-end procedure as V.34 and V.90, where special codes (data rate 2 0 ) Is used to indicate the final words. However, the modem transmission technology can use different paper sizes to apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -69--, Γ 0 ^ 1 ϋ ϋ 1 ϋ · n ϋ 0 1 · III ϋ ϋ 1, J 1 1 n-(Please read the note w on the back before filling this page) 499809 Α7 ----------- Β7 V. Description of the invention (67) Bit recombination or balance some reserved bits. This user request, APCM 1 6 04 will generate an appropriate data status signal (for example, modem wait request, fast reconnect request, etc.) followed by an "A" tone for reception by DPC MU 1602 . As described above with reference to FIG. 15, D PC C 1620 then responds to the following “B” tone response with an appropriate status signal (for example, the modem waits for confirmation, Q T S signal, etc.). In this way, the technology of the present invention can be applied to any situation related to telephone plug-in alert, office line interruption, or office line damage event. In one embodiment, the present invention provides techniques to reduce the initialization time and reconnection time typically associated with V.90 modem systems. Quick start and fast reconnect technologies balance the known channel characteristics of previous connections to reduce the training time associated with subsequent attempts to establish the same connection. Although not limited to any particular modem application, a quick-start procedure can be used to avoid parts of the initialization protocol or processing typically used by 56 kbps modems, for example, V. 8 bis, V. 8 digital impairment learning , Initial training, exploration and ranging, and more. In addition, compared to traditional computer startup technology, fast startup technology can perform certain operations at different times or in different orders. Referring back to FIG. 5, it is shown that during the phase 4 of the V · 90 training process, the AP CM modem 5 9 0 and the DPCM modem 5 8 0 pass through the CP and MP boxes 5 1 0 and 5 2 0, respectively. Exchange different parameters. Figure 17 shows the different bits of information and parameters that can be included in an example MP sequence or box 1700. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) # ----;-Order II ------- -· Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-70- 499809

五、發明說明(68 ) 參考圖17,可見ΜΡ框1 700具有同步格式並包 含1 7個具有「1」的同步位元(位元〇 : 1 6 ),由一 個啓始位元1 7 0 2 (位元1 7 )跟隨在後且以1 6個位 元的CRC 1730 (位元171 : 186)結束。 CRC位元1 7 3 0係由AP CM數據機5 8 0使用以查 證Μ P框1 7 0 〇的正確性。如同所示,μ P框1 7 0 0 也包含未來可使用之保留位元1 7 0 4 (位元1 9 )。 ΜΡ框1700又包含確認位元1710 (位元33)。 確認位元1710爲「〇」°ΜΡ框1700中的其它位 元資訊包含資料發訊速率、格子編碼器選取位元、非線性 編碼器參數選取位元、星座選取位元、資料發訊速率比率 掩罩、不對稱資料發訊速率致動及很多位元的碼化前資訊 確認位元1 7 1 0會由D P C Μ數據機5 9 0設定爲 「1」以確認收到A P C Μ數據機5 8 〇傳送的C Ρ框 5 10 (參見圖5)。具有設定爲「1」之確認位元 1 7 1 0之ΜΡ框1 700會以ΜΡ!框5 2 2表示(參見 圖5)。應注意’ΜΡ框510及ΜΡ !框5 1 2均包含相 同數目的位元及資訊,但唯一差異係確認位元1 7 1 〇的 値。 參考圖18 ’顯示CP框18〇〇的範例定義位元。 類似於Μ Ρ框1 7 0 0,C Ρ框1 8 〇 〇係同步型的框, 具有17個爲1之同步領先位元18 01 (位元〇 : 16 ),一啓始位元1802 (位元17)跟隨在後並以16 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - ----L--—訂---------線- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -71 _ 499809 A7 ............ ... B7 五、發明說明(69 ) 位元的CRC 1830結束(位元273 + 5 : 288 +5) °CRC位元1830會由DPCM數據機590 利用以查證C P框1 8 0 0的正確性。如同所示’ C P框 18〇〇也包含未來可使用之保留位元1 804 (位元 18)。確認位元1810爲「0」°CP框1800中 的其它位元資訊包含資料發訊速率、靜音時段位元、用於 譜頻整型參數之正負號位元、星座資訊及包含可變長度參 數等很多其它的位元資訊,,可變長度參數可加長CP框 1 8 〇 〇的大小。 確認位元1 8 1 0會由AP CM數據機5 8 0設定爲 「1」以確認收到D P C Μ數據機5 9 0傳送的Μ P框 520 (參見圖5)。具有設定爲「1」的確認位元 1810之CP框1800係以CP>框522表示(參 見圖5) 〇CP框510及CP/框512均包含相同數 目的位元及資訊,唯一差異在於確認位元1 8 1 0的値。 參考圖19 ,顯示可能包含於ITU V. 92建議 中之C P a框1 9 0 0的初期定義位元。類似於Μ P框及 CP框1700和1800,CPa框1900係同步型 的框,具有17個爲1之同步領先位元1901(位元0 :1 6 ),一啓始位元1 9 0 2 (位元1 7 )跟隨在後並 以16位元的CRC 1930結束。CRC位元 1 9 3 0會由A P CM數據機(參見圖2 4 c )利用以查 證C P a框1 9 0 0的正確性。如同所示,C P a框 1 9 00也包含尙未定義之保留位元1 9 04 (位元2 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) - 訂----------線- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4998U9 Α7V. Description of the invention (68) Referring to FIG. 17, it can be seen that the MP frame 1 700 has a synchronization format and includes 17 synchronization bits (bits 0: 16) having a "1", and a start bit 1 7 0 2 (bits 17) follows and ends with a 16-bit CRC 1730 (bits 171: 186). The CRC bit 1730 is used by the AP CM modem 5800 to verify the correctness of the MP frame 1700. As shown, the μ P box 17 0 0 also contains reserved bits 1 7 4 (bits 19) which can be used in the future. MP box 1700 in turn contains confirmation bit 1710 (bit 33). Confirm that bit 1710 is "0" ° Other bit information in MP frame 1700 includes data transmission rate, trellis encoder selection bit, non-linear encoder parameter selection bit, constellation selection bit, data transmission rate ratio Mask, asymmetric data transmission rate actuation, and many bits of information confirmation before encoding 1 7 1 0 will be set by DPC Μ modem 5 9 0 to "1" to confirm receipt of APC Μ modem 5 8 0 transmitted CP box 5 10 (see Figure 5). The MP frame 1 700 with the confirmation bit 1 7 1 0 set to "1" will be represented by the MP frame 5 2 2 (see Fig. 5). It should be noted that both the 'MP box 510 and the MP! Box 5 1 2 contain the same number of bits and information, but the only difference is the confirmation of the bit 1 7 1 0. Referring to FIG. 18 ', an example definition bit of CP box 180 is shown. Similar to MP frame 1700, CP frame 1800 is a synchronous frame, with 17 synchronization leading bits 18 01 (bit 0: 16), and a starting bit 1802 ( Bit 17) followed by 16 (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page)----- L --- Order --------- Line-Staff of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs The paper size printed by the consumer cooperative is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -71 _ 499809 A7 ............ B7 V. Description of the invention (69 ) The end of CRC 1830 (bits 273 + 5: 288 +5) ° CRC bit 1830 will be used by DPCM modem 590 to verify the correctness of CP box 1 800. As shown, the 'C P box 180' also contains reserved bits 1 804 (bit 18) which can be used in the future. Confirm that bit 1810 is "0" ° Other bit information in CP box 1800 includes data transmission rate, mute period bit, sign bit for spectral frequency integer parameters, constellation information, and contains variable length parameters With a lot of other bit information, the variable length parameter can lengthen the size of the CP box 1 800. The confirmation bit 1 8 1 0 will be set to "1" by the AP CM modem 5 8 0 to confirm receipt of the MP frame 520 transmitted by the D PC C modem 5 9 0 (see Figure 5). The CP box 1800 with the confirmation bit 1810 set to "1" is indicated by the CP > box 522 (see Fig. 5). CP box 510 and CP / box 512 both contain the same number of bits and information. Bit 1 8 1 0. Referring to Figure 19, the initial definition bits of the C P a box 1 900 which may be included in the ITU V. 92 recommendation are shown. Similar to MP frame and CP frame 1700 and 1800, CPa frame 1900 is a synchronous frame, with 17 synchronization leading bits 1901 (bits 0:16), and a start bit 1 9 0 2 (Bit 1 7) follows and ends with a 16-bit CRC 1930. The CRC bit 1 9 3 0 is used by the AP CM modem (see Figure 2 4 c) to verify the correctness of the C P a box 1 900. As shown, CP a box 1 9 00 also contains 定义 undefined reserved bit 1 9 04 (bit 2 1 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) (please read the back first) Note to note? Please fill in this page again)-Order ---------- Line-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy

五、發明說明(7〇 ) °CPa框1900又包含確認位元1910( 1^33) °用於cpa框1900之確認位元1910 爲「〇」°確認位元191〇會由DPCM數據機設定爲 1」以確認收到A P C Μ數據機傳送的C P框(參見圖 24c) °CPa框19〇〇中的其它位元資訊包含具有 胃$析1度之星座資訊以及前碼化器和前瀘波器係收及很多 立元資訊’很多其它位元資訊係包含能顯著地增加 c p s框1 9 0 〇的長度之可變長度參數。 假使I T U建議v · 3 4及V · 9 0的確認機制如同 參考圖1 7及1 8所述般要用於I TU建議V · 9 2,則 c P a框及C P a /框將包含相同數目的位元及資訊,唯 一的差異在於確認位元1 9 1 0的値。 3 4及V · 9 0建議中所使用的參數交換及確認機制 在訓練處理中導入顯著的消耗及延遲。如圖5所示,數據 機5 8 0及5 9 0會連續地傳送CP和MP框5 1 0和 5 2 0直到收到來自遠端數據機的確認框爲止。即使確認 框將顯著的消耗及延遲導入於握手處理中,但是相同的先 前傳送的資訊位元仍無須被一再地傳送。由於在大部份的 情形中,Μ P或C P框的第一傳送會由遠端數據機正確地 接收,所以,C Ρ、Μ Ρ、C Ρ >及Μ Ρ >的這些連續傳 送及再傳送是不需要的。因此,由於確認位元事實上是最 高效位元資訊,所以,變成不需要再傳送Μ Ρ /或C Ρ / 框中所有的資訊位元。 爲了免除握手處理期間大量的消耗及延遲,如圖2 0 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) - 訂---------線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 73- 499809 A7 -B7 五、發明說明(71 ) (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 一 2 2的實施例所示,本發明揭示短參數框。參考圖2 〇 ’顯示短Μ P框(Μ P s ) 2 0 0 0的範例定義位元。如 同所示,正如同ΜΡ框1700般,MPs框2〇〇〇係 同步型的框,具有17個爲1之同步領先位元2 0 0 1 ( 位元0 : 16),一啓始位元2002 (位元17)跟隨 在後並以16位元的CRC 2030 (位元35 : 50 )結束。CRC位元2030會由APCM數據機580 利用以查證Μ P s框2 0 0 0的正確性。又如同所示, MPs框2000也包含MPs標記位元2004 (位元 19)以區別MPs框2000與MP框17〇〇。再參 考圖1 7,注意對應的位元區係保留位元1 7 0 4。 MPs框2000又包含確認位元2010 (位元33) 。確認位元2 0 1 0係「0」。確認位元2 0 1 〇會由 D P C Μ數據機設定爲「1」以確認收到A P C Μ數據機 傳送的CP框(參考圖24b)。具有確認2010設定 爲「1」之MPs框2000係以MPs/框表示。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 MP s框及MP s >框均包含相同數目的位元及資訊,唯 一的差別在於確認位元2 0 1 0的値。但是,Μ P s及 Μ P s >框實際上分別比Μ Ρ及Μ Ρ >框還短。 現在,參考圖21,顯示短CP框(CPs) 2 1 0 0的範例定義位元。如同所75,正如同C P框 1800般,CPs框2100係同步型的框,具有17 個爲1之同步領先位元2101 (位元0 : 16),一啓 始位元2 1 〇 2 (位元1 7 )跟隨在後並以1 6位元的 74- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 --- B7 五、發明說明(72 ) CRC 2130 (位元35 : 50)結束。CRC位元 21 3 〇會由DP CM數據機5 9 0利用以查證CP s框 2 1 0 〇的正確性。又如同所示,C P s框2 1 0 0也包 含c P s標記位元2 1 0 4 (位元1 8 )以區別C P s框 2 1〇〇與CP框1 800。再參考圖18,注意對應的 位元區係保留位元1 8 0 4。CP s框2 1 0 0又包含確 認位元2 1 1 0 (位元3 3 )。確認位元2 1 1 0係「0 」。確認位元2 1 1 0會由A P C Μ數據機設定爲「1」 以確認收到D P C Μ數據機傳送的Μ Ρ框(參考圖2 4 b )。具有確認2 1 1 0設定爲「1」之C P s框2 1 0 〇 係以C P s >框表示。C P s框及C P s /框均包含相同 數目的位元及資訊,唯一的差別在於確認位元2 1 1 0的 値。但是,應注意C P s及C P s /框實際上分別比C ρ 及C P /框還短。 參考圖21 ,顯示短CPa框(CPas) 22〇〇 的範例定義位元。如同所示,正如同C P a框1 9 0 〇般 ,CPa s框2200係同步型的框,具有17個爲1之 同步領先位元2201 (位元0: 16),一啓始位元 2202 (位元17)跟隨在後並以16位元的CRC 2230 (位元35 : 50)結束。CRC位元 2230會由APCM數據機利用以查證CPa s框 2 2 0 〇的正確性。又如同所示,C P a s框2 2 0 〇也 包含CPa s標記位元2104 (位元18 : 20)以區 別CPa s框2200與CPa框1900。再參考圖 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) -75 - (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 訂.. -線· 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(73 ) 1 9 ,注意對應的位元區係保留位元1 9 0 4。C P a s 框2 2 0 0又包含確認位元2 2 1 0 (位元3 3 )。確認 位元21 10係「0」。確認位元2210會由DPCM 數據機設定爲「1」以確認收到A P C Μ數據機傳送的 C Ρ框(參考圖2 4 c )。具有確認2 1 1 0設定爲「1 」2CPa s框2200係以CPa s /框表示。 CP a s框及CP a s >框均包含相同數目的位元及資訊 ,唯一的差別在於確認位元2 2 1 0的値。C P a s及 C P a s /框實際上也分別比C P a及C P a /框還短。 圖2 3係顯示傳統上根據I T U建議V · 3 4分別在 AP CM數據機2 3 1 0與DPCM數據機2 3 2 0之間 交換嵌入於Μ P序列或框2 3 1 2及2 3 2 2中的參數。 如同所示,在階段4的T R Ν部份2 3 1 1及2 3 1 2或 是握手處理的最後訓練之後,A P C Μ及D P C Μ數據機 23 1 0及2320會分別交換ΜΡ框2 3 1 2及 2322 °ΜΡ 框 23 12 及 2322 係爲圖 17 的ΜΡ 框1 7 0 0中所示的形式。如同所示,在A P C Ρ開始傳 送Μ P框2 3 1 2之前的短暫時間內,D P C Μ數據機 2 3 2 0開始傳送Μ Ρ框2 3 2 2。結果,A P C Μ數據 機2 3 1 0會在D P C Μ數據機2 3 2 0收到Μ Ρ框 23 1 2之前接收ΜΡ框2322。爲了回應,APCM 數據機2 3 1 0會設定Μ Ρ框中的確認位元,因而產生 Μ Ρ /框,並開始傳送Μ Ρ >框2 3 1 4,Μ Ρ /框 2 3 1 4包含先前經由Μ Ρ框2 3 1 2傳送給D P C Μ數 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - -----r---訂---------. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -76 - 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 ~——-2Z_— __五、發明說明(74 ) 據機2 3 2 0之個別及每一位元資訊。當d P C Μ等待它 自己的Μ Ρ框2 3 2 2的確認自A P C Μ數據機2 3 1 〇 送來時,另一ΜΡ框2 3 2 2會由DP CM數據機 2 3 2 〇傳送至APCM數據機2 3 1 0以提供APCM 數據機2 3 1 0第二次機會以接收Μ P框2 3 2 2。同時 ’ A P C μ數據機2 3 1 0已經收到第一 Μ Ρ框2 3 2 2 且未收到它的ΜΡ框2 3 1 2或它的ΜΡ >框2 3 1 4之 確認’因此,AP CM數據機2 3 1 0會產生第二ΜΡ 一 框以給予D P C Μ第三次機會以接收分別嵌入於Μ P或 Μρ >框2 3 1 2或2 3 1 4中的參數。但是,如同所示 ’ D P c Μ數據機2 3 2 0已經開始傳送Μ Ρ >框 2 3 2 4。在傳送及接收時間域中這些長框及它們的重疊 會防止數據機2 3 1 0及2 3 2 0快速地交換參數。延遲 事實上是累積的。當從遠端數據機接收Μ Ρ >框時,長的 Μ Ρ及Μ Ρ /框之傳送及接收會促使一數據機開始傳送長 的Μ Ρ框;但是,直到收到及查證C R C位元時,Μ Ρ 一 框才會被確認。因此,接收Μ Ρ /框的數據機不需要開始 傳送另一長的Μ Ρ框。 再參考圖5,也注意到長的CP、CP>、ΜΡ及 MP>框510、 512、 520及522不是因爲傳送 錯誤而是僅僅因爲這些框的的傳送及接收之時序差異,分 別交換很多次。事實上很淸楚的是,類似於I T U建議 V · 9 2之機制將因爲C P a框比Μ P及C P框長很多而 導致更長的延遲。 本紙張尺度適用中關家標準(CNS)A4規格⑽X 297公釐)„77- "" <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - -ϋ 1 n ϋ 1 m^eJ> n n n ϋ 線- 499809 Α7 --—___ Β7 五、發明說明(75 ) 因此’在本發明的一實施例中,如圖2 4 a中所示, 分別類似於圖2 〇中的Μ P s框之短的Μ P及Μ P >框( 以?3及減?8/)2423和2424會被用以實際地 減少參數交換時間及在數據機間取得較快的連接。參考圖 24a ’正如同圖23般,數據機2410及2420分 別交換長的Μ P框2 4 1 2及2 4 2 2。但是,在此傳輸 之後,二數據機會切換至短的Μ Ρ框格式。如同所示, DP CM數據機2 4 2 0會緊接在傳送ΜΡ框2 4 2 2之 後並正等待從A P C Μ數據機2 4 1 0接收整個Μ P框 2 4 1 2時,開始傳送Μ P s框2 4 2 3。緊接在傳送 ΜΡ框24 1 2之後,APCM數據機24 1 0藉由傳送 短的Μ Ρ >框2 4 1 4 ( Μ P s / )以確認從D P C Μ數 據機2420收到ΜΡ框2422。另一方面,當送出 減?3框242 3時,〇?0^1數據機2420會接收 ΜΡ框2412並藉由送出MPs/框2424以確認該 框。短框的傳送會實際減少握手時間及造成二數據機 2 4 1 0與2 4 2 0之間的快速連接。 藉由相同的記號,圖2 4 b中的短C P及Μ P框之交 換將加速符合V · 9 0之數據機的連接時間。如同所示, 分別類似於圖2 0中的Μ P s框2 0 0 〇及圖2 1中的 CPs 框 2100 之短的MP、MP>、CP 及 CP / 框 (MPs、MPs' CPs 及 CPs;) 2463、 2464、(未顯示)及2454可用於符合V·90的 數據機。使用這些短的框實際上會減少參數交換時間及造 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) : " (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) - ----1 — — — 訂·-----I — I 線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 ____ B7 五、發明說明(76 ) 成數據機之間較快速的連接。參考圖2 4 b,二數據機 2 4 5 〇與2 4 6 0會分別交換長的CP及MP框 2452及2462。在這些長框的傳送之後,數據機開 始傳送短的C P及Μ P框型式。如同所示,緊接在傳送 減?框2 4 6 2之後及等待從AP CM數據機2 4 5 0接 收整個CP框2452時,DPCM數據機2460開始 傳送MPs框2463。緊接在傳送CP框2452之後 ’ APCM數據機2450藉由傳送短的CP —框 2 4 5 4 ( C P s / )以確認從D P C Μ數據機2 4 6 0 收到ΜΡ框2 4 6 2。另一方面,當送出MP s框 2 4 6 3時,D P C Μ數據機2 4 6 0會接收Μ Ρ框 2 4 5 2並藉由送出MP s —框2 4 6 4以確認該框。 主要由於嵌入於C P a框1 9 0 0中的資訊量及參數 (參考圖1 9 ),短框的傳送會造成特別是符合V . 9 2 數據機之快速連接。參考圖2 4 c,分別類似於圖2 2中 的CPa s框2200及圖21中的CPs框2100之 短的 CPa、CPas^、CP 及 CP'框(CPas、 CPas^、CPs 及 CPs>) 2493、 2494、 (未顯示)及2 4 8 4可用於符合V · 9 2的數據機。使 用這些短的框實際上會減少參數交換時間。結果, V · 9 2並容的數據機可取得快速連接。參考圖2 4 c, 二數據機2 4 8 0與2 4 9 0會分別首先交換長的C P及 CP a框2 4 8 2及2 49 2。在這些長框的傳送之後, 數據機開始傳送短的C P及C P a框型式。如同所示,緊 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) - ϋ Mmme ι ί I ϋ H 一-口*' n I —.1 n n n ϋ I i 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -79- 圖2 5 / 或 C P a 。參考调2 A7 —_B7 五x發明說明(77 ) 接在傳送C P a框2 4 9 2之後及等待從A P C Μ數據機 2 4 8〇接收整個cp框2482時,DPCM數據機 2 4 9 〇開始傳送c p 3 s框2 4 9 3。緊接在傳送C P 框2482之後’ APCM數據機2480藉由傳送短的 C p 〆r 框2 4 8 4 ( c P s > )以確認從d P C Μ數據機 2490收到〇?3框2492。另一方面,當送出 CP a s框249 3時,DPCM數據機249 0會接收 (:?框2482並藉由送出cpa s /框2494以確認 該框。 a、 25b及25c係顯示長框MP、 CP及 * ή ί妾收數據機適當地接收之一些情形的範例 5 a ’根據本發明的一實施例,a p c Μ及 D P C Μ數據機2 5 1 〇和2 5 2 0分別交換Μ Ρ框 2 5 1 2及2 5 2 2之一些情形的實施例。緊接在長的 ΜΡ框2 5 1 2及2 5 2 2的傳送之後,二數據機 2 5 1 〇及2 5 2 〇會分別切換至短ΜΡ框2 5 1 3和 2 5 2 3的傳送。如同所示,DPCM數據機2 5 2 0會 適當地接收ΜΡ框2 5 1 2。因此,爲了回應,DPCM 數據機2520會以MPs/框2524確認ΜΡ框 2512。但是,另一方面,APCM 2510無法接 收Μ P框2 5 2 2。此失敗係導因於諸如不良傳輸、不良 的線路條件、錯誤的C R C等不同原因。此失敗之結果係 A P C Μ數據機2 5 1 0繼續傳送具有設定爲「0」的確 認之Μ P s框2 5 1 3,設定爲「0」的確認係指Μ Ρ框 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) ----r---訂---------線. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -80- 499809 A7V. Description of the invention (70) ° CPa frame 1900 also contains the confirmation bit 1910 (1 ^ 33) ° The confirmation bit 1910 for cpa frame 1900 is "0" ° The confirmation bit 1910 will be set by the DPCM modem "1" to confirm receipt of the CP frame transmitted by the APC M modem (see Figure 24c). The other bit information in the ° CPa frame 1900 includes constellation information with a degree of stomach analysis of 1 degree, as well as a precoder and preamble. The wave device system contains a lot of legislative information. Many other bit informations include variable length parameters that can significantly increase the length of the cps box 190. If the ITU recommendation v · 34 and V · 90 confirmation mechanisms are to be used for I TU recommendation V · 92 as described with reference to Figs. 17 and 18, the c P a box and CP a / box will contain the same The only difference is the number of bits and information. The parameter exchange and confirmation mechanisms used in the 3 4 and V · 9 0 recommendations introduce significant costs and delays in training processing. As shown in Figure 5, modems 580 and 590 will continuously transmit CP and MP frames 5 1 0 and 5 2 0 until they receive confirmation frames from the remote modem. Even if the confirmation frame introduces significant consumption and delay into the handshake process, the same previously transmitted information bits need not be transmitted again and again. Since in most cases the first transmission of the MP or CP frame will be correctly received by the remote modem, these continuous transmissions of CP, MP, CP > and MP > and Retransmission is not required. Therefore, since the confirmation bit is actually the most efficient bit information, it becomes unnecessary to transmit all the information bits in the MP / Cp / frame. In order to avoid a large amount of consumption and delay during the handshake process, as shown in Figure 20 (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page)-Order --------- Line · Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs employee consumption The paper size printed by the cooperative applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 73- 499809 A7 -B7 V. Description of the invention (71) (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling this page) As shown in a 22 embodiment, the present invention discloses a short parameter box. Referring to FIG. 20 ′, an example definition bit of a short MP frame (MPs) 2 0 0 is shown. As shown, just like the MP frame 1700, the MPs frame 2000 is a synchronous frame, with 17 synchronization leading bits of 2 1 (bits 0: 16), a start bit 2002 (bit 17) follows and ends with a 16-bit CRC 2030 (bits 35:50). The CRC bit 2030 is used by the APCM modem 580 to verify the correctness of the MPs box 2 00 0. Also as shown, the MPs box 2000 also includes the MPs tag bit 2004 (bit 19) to distinguish the MPs box 2000 from the MP box 1700. Referring to Figure 17 again, note that the corresponding bit area reserved bit 1 7 0 4. The MPs box 2000 in turn contains a confirmation bit 2010 (bit 33). Confirm that bit 2 0 1 0 is "0". The confirmation bit 2 0 10 is set to "1" by the DPCM modem to confirm receipt of the CP frame transmitted by the APCM modem (refer to Figure 24b). The MPs box 2000 with a confirmation 2010 setting of "1" is indicated as MPs / box. The MP s box and MP s > box printed by the Employee Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs all contain the same number of bits and information. The only difference is the confirmation of bit 2 0 1 0. However, the MPs and MPs > boxes are actually shorter than the MP and MP > boxes, respectively. Now, referring to FIG. 21, an example definition bit of short CP boxes (CPs) 2 1 0 0 is shown. As with 75, just like the CP frame 1800, the CPs frame 2100 is a synchronous frame, with 17 synchronous leading bits 2101 (bits 0: 16) and a start bit 2 1 〇2 (bit Yuan 1 7) Followed by 74 digits of 16 digits- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 --- B7 V. Description of the invention (72) End of CRC 2130 (bits 35:50). The CRC bit 21 3 0 is used by the DP CM modem 5 9 0 to verify the correctness of the CP s frame 2 1 0 0. Also as shown, the CP frame 2 1 0 0 also contains the c P s flag bit 2 104 (bit 1 8) to distinguish the CP frame 2 100 from the CP frame 1 800. Referring again to FIG. 18, note that the corresponding bit area reserved bit 1 8 0 4. The CP s box 2 1 0 0 in turn contains the confirmation bit 2 1 1 0 (bit 3 3). Confirm that bit 2 1 1 0 is "0". The confirmation bit 2 1 10 will be set to "1" by the AP PC modem to confirm receipt of the MP frame transmitted by the DP PC modem (refer to Fig. 24b). The C P s frame 2 1 0 with a confirmation that 2 1 1 0 is set to "1" is represented by a C P s > frame. Both the C P s box and the C P s / box contain the same number of bits and information. The only difference is the confirmation of the bit 2 of the bit 2 1 1 0. However, it should be noted that C P s and C P s / frame are actually shorter than C ρ and C P / frame, respectively. Referring to FIG. 21, an example definition bit of a short CPa box (CPas) 2200 is shown. As shown, just like CP a frame 1 900, CPa s frame 2200 is a synchronous frame, with 17 synchronization leading bits 2201 (bits 0: 16) of 1, and a start bit 2202. (Bit 17) follows and ends with a 16-bit CRC 2230 (bits 35:50). The CRC bit 2230 is used by the APCM modem to verify the correctness of the CPa s frame 2 2 00. As shown, the CPas box 2 2 0 0 also contains the CPas flag bit 2104 (bits 18:20) to distinguish the CPas box 2200 from the CPa box 1900. Refer to the drawing again. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) -75-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page} Order.-Line · 499809 A7 B7 V. Invention Explanation (73) 1 9, pay attention to the corresponding bit area reserved bit 1 9 0 4. CP as box 2 2 0 0 also contains confirmation bit 2 2 1 0 (bit 3 3). Confirmation bit 21 10 It is "0". The confirmation bit 2210 will be set to "1" by the DPCM modem to confirm receipt of the CP frame transmitted by the APC M modem (refer to Fig. 2 4 c). With confirmation 2 1 1 0 is set to "1 "2CPa s frame 2200 is expressed in CPa s / frame. Both CP as frame and CP as > frame contain the same number of bits and information, the only difference is the confirmation of bit 2 2 1 0. CP as and CP as / box is actually shorter than CP a and CP a / box respectively. Figure 2 3 shows traditionally according to ITU recommendations V · 3 4 in AP CM modem 2 3 1 0 and DPCM modem 2 3 2 0 The parameters embedded in the MP sequence or in the boxes 2 3 1 2 and 2 3 2 2 are exchanged between each other. As shown, the TR Ν part 2 3 1 1 and 2 3 1 2 in phase 4 or the end of the handshake process training After that, the APC M and DPC M modems 23 1 0 and 2320 will exchange MP frames 2 3 1 2 and 2322 ° MP frames 23 12 and 2322, respectively, as shown in MP frame 17 0 0 of Fig. 17. As shown, a short time before APC P starts to transmit MP box 2 3 1 2, DPC M modem 2 3 2 0 begins to transmit MP box 2 3 2 2. As a result, APC MP modem 2 3 1 0 will Receive the MP box 2322 before the DPC MP modem 2 3 2 0 receives the MP box 23 1 2. In response, the APCM modem 2 3 1 0 will set the confirmation bit in the MP box and thus generate MP / box And start transmitting MP > Box 2 3 1 4, MP / Box 2 3 1 4 contains the number of MPs previously transmitted to DPC via MP Box 2 3 1 2 (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) ------ r --- Order ---------. The paper size printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -76-499809 A7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ~ ——- 2Z_— __ V. Invention Description (74) Individual and each bit of information according to the machine 2 3 2 0. When the d PC M waits for confirmation from its own MP box 2 3 2 2 to be sent from the APC MP modem 2 3 1 0, the other MP box 2 3 2 2 will be transmitted by the DP CM modem 2 3 2 0 to APCM modem 2 3 1 0 to provide APCM modem 2 3 1 0 a second chance to receive MP box 2 3 2 2. At the same time, 'APC μ modem 2 3 1 0 has received the first MP box 2 3 2 2 and has not received its MP box 2 3 1 2 or its MP > box 2 3 1 4 confirmation' Therefore, The AP CM modem 2 3 1 0 will generate a second MP frame to give the DPC M a third chance to receive the parameters embedded in MP or MP > boxes 2 3 1 2 or 2 3 1 4 respectively. However, as shown, 'D P c M modem 2 3 2 0 has started transmitting MP > box 2 3 2 4. These long boxes and their overlap in the transmit and receive time domain will prevent the modems 2 3 0 and 2 3 2 0 from quickly exchanging parameters. Delays are actually cumulative. When receiving MP > frames from a remote modem, transmission and reception of long MP and MP / frames will prompt a modem to start transmitting long MP frames; however, until the CRC bit is received and verified Only when the MP box is confirmed. Therefore, the modem receiving the MP / frame does not need to start transmitting another long MP frame. Referring again to FIG. 5, it is also noted that the long CP, CP >, MP, and MP > boxes 510, 512, 520, and 522 are not exchanged because of transmission errors but simply because of the timing difference between the transmission and reception of these boxes. . In fact, it is quite plausible that a mechanism similar to the I T U recommendation V · 92 will cause a longer delay because the C P a box is much longer than the MP and C P boxes. This paper size applies the Zhongguanjia Standard (CNS) A4 size ⑽ X 297 mm) „77- " " < Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)--ϋ 1 n ϋ 1 m ^ eJ > nnn ϋ line-499809 Α7 ---___ Β7 V. Description of the invention (75) Therefore, in an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 24a, it is similar to the MPs box in FIG. 20, respectively. The short MP and MP > boxes (with 3 and minus 8 /) 2423 and 2424 will be used to actually reduce the parameter exchange time and obtain a faster connection between the modems. Refer to Figure 24a. As shown in Figure 23, modems 2410 and 2420 exchange long MP boxes 2 4 1 2 and 2 4 2 2 respectively. However, after this transmission, the two data machines switch to the short MP box format. As shown, The DP CM modem 2 4 2 0 will be transmitted immediately after the MP frame 2 4 2 2 and is waiting to receive the entire MP frame 2 4 1 0 from the APC Μ modem 2 4 1 0, and the MP frame 2 will be transmitted. 4 2 3. Immediately after the MP frame 24 1 2 is transmitted, the APCM modem 24 1 0 transmits a short MP and frame 2 4 1 4 (MPs /) to confirm receipt from the DPC M modem 2420. To MP box 24 22. On the other hand, when sending a minus 3 frame 242 3, 〇0 ^ 1 modem 2420 will receive MP frame 2412 and confirm the frame by sending MPs / frame 2424. The transmission of the short frame will actually reduce the handshake Time and the fast connection between the two modems 2 4 1 0 and 2 4 2 0. With the same notation, the exchange of the short CP and MP boxes in Figure 2 4 b will accelerate the data conforming to V · 90 As shown, the MP, MP >, CP, and CP / frame (MPs, MP >, CP, and CP / frame (MPs, MPs' CPs and CPs;) 2463, 2464, (not shown), and 2454 can be used for V · 90-compliant modems. Using these short boxes will actually reduce parameter exchange time and cost. Paper standards are applicable to Chinese national standards (CNS ) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm): " (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page)----- 1 — — — Order · ----- I — I line · Economy Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau 499809 A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the invention (76) Faster connection between modems. Refer to Figure 2 4b. Second modem 2 450 and 2 460 will exchange long CP and MP boxes 2452 and 2462 respectively. After transmission of these long frames, the modem starts transmitting short CP and MP frame types. As shown, immediately following the transmission minus? After frame 2 4 6 2 and waiting to receive the entire CP frame 2452 from AP CM modem 2 450, DPCM modem 2460 starts transmitting MPs frame 2463. Immediately after the CP frame 2452 is transmitted, the APCM modem 2450 confirms that it has received the MP frame 2 4 6 2 by transmitting the short CP-frame 2 4 5 4 (C P s /). On the other hand, when the MP s frame 2 4 6 3 is sent out, the D PC C modem 2 4 60 will receive the MP frame 2 4 5 2 and confirm the frame by sending out the MP s-frame 2 4 6 4. Mainly due to the amount of information and parameters embedded in the C P a box 1 900 (refer to Figure 19), the transmission of the short frame will cause a fast connection, especially for V. 9 2 modems. Referring to FIG. 24 c, the short CPa, CPas ^, CP, and CP 'boxes (CPas, CPas ^, CPs, and CPs >) similar to the CPa s box 2200 in FIG. 22 and the CPs box 2100 in FIG. 21, respectively 2493, 2494, (not shown) and 2 4 8 4 are available for modems that comply with V · 9 2. Using these short boxes actually reduces parameter exchange time. As a result, V · 9 2 compatible modems can be quickly connected. Referring to Fig. 2c, the two modems 2480 and 2490 will first exchange the long C P and CP a boxes 2 4 8 2 and 2 49 2 respectively. After the transmission of these long frames, the modem starts to transmit short C P and C P a frame types. As shown, the paper size of this paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page)-ϋ Mmme ι I ϋ H 一-口 * 'n I —.1 nnn ϋ I i Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy -79- Figure 25 / or CP a. Reference tune 2 A7 —_B7 Five x invention description (77) After transmitting CP a box 2 4 9 2 and waiting to receive the entire cp box 2482 from APC M modem 2 4 80, DPCM modem 2 4 9 starts. Send cp 3 s box 2 4 9 3. Immediately after the CP box 2482 was transmitted, the APCM modem 2480 transmitted a short C p 〆r box 2 4 8 4 (c P s >) to confirm receipt from the d PC M modem 2490 to the 3 box 2492. . On the other hand, when sending CP as box 249 3, DPCM modem 249 0 will receive (:? Box 2482 and confirm the box by sending cpa s / box 2494. a, 25b and 25c show the long box MP, CP and * Price Example of some cases where the receiving modem is properly received 5 a 'According to an embodiment of the present invention, the apc M and DPC M modems 2 5 1 0 and 2 5 2 0 respectively exchange MP frame 2 5 1 2 and 2 5 2 2 in some cases. Immediately after the long MP frames 2 5 1 2 and 2 5 2 2 are transmitted, the two modems 2 5 1 0 and 2 5 2 0 will be switched respectively. Transmission to short MP boxes 2 5 1 3 and 2 5 2 3. As shown, the DPCM modem 2 5 2 0 will properly receive the MP boxes 2 5 1 2. Therefore, in response, the DPCM modem 2520 will send MPs as MPs. / Box 2524 confirms MP Box 2512. However, on the other hand, APCM 2510 cannot receive MP Box 2 5 2 2. This failure is due to different reasons such as poor transmission, poor line conditions, incorrect CRC, etc. This failure The result is that the APC M modem 2 5 1 0 continues to transmit the MP Ps box with the confirmation set to "0" 2 5 1 3, and the confirmation set to "0" refers to Box P (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) ---- r --- Order --------- line. Printed on paper by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -80- 499809 A7

五、發明說明(78 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 2 5 2 2未被收到。在這些情形中,根據本發明的一實施 例,D P c Μ數據機2 5 2 0再度開始傳送長的Μ P框。 由於D p c Μ數據機2 5 2 0已收到Μ Ρ框2 5 1 2,所 以由D p c Μ數據機2 5 2 0傳送的新的長Μ Ρ框 2 5 2 5將使它們的確認位元設定爲「1」。換言之,由 於短框未包含所有需要的參數,所以,D P C Μ數據機 2 5 2 〇開始傳送ΜΡ >框。在一些實施例中,DP CM 數據機2520可僅傳送一MP>框2525,接著切換 至傳送MPs /框2524 (舉例而言,圖25b)。 在決定傳送短Μ P框的時段之後何時開始再傳送長的 Μ Ρ框時,D P C Μ數據機2 5 2 0可使用不同的條件, 事件或方法。在一實施例中,假使在數據機2 5 2 0或 2 5 1 〇完成它自己的長ΜΡ框傳送之後,DP CM數據 機2 5 2 0或是AP CM數據機2 5 1 0接收比來回延遲 還多之Μ P或Μ P s框的開頭,則數據機2 5 2 0或 2 5 1 0可開始再度傳送長的Μ Ρ框。在另一實施例中, 在長的ΜΡ框再度傳送之前,諸如2 0 - 3 〇m s的額外 時間可加至來回延遲時間以允許偵測延遲。習於此一般技 藝者熟知來回延遲的計算。在某些實施例中,在決定數據 機在送出短的Μ P框之後何時應再度送出長的Μ P框時, 可使用定量的時間作爲暫停時間。在又另一實施例中,可 利用預定事件,舉例而言,由正等待確認之數據機傳送的 短ΜΡ框之數目。舉例而言,假使AP CM數據機 2 5 1 0傳送三Μ P s框,但未收到確認時,則A P C Μ (請先閱讀背面之注音2事項再填寫本頁) - -ϋ I I ϋ ϋ 一:OJ n n n ϋ 線· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -81 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明(79 ) 數據機2 5 1 0會傳送另一MP框。 現在,參考2 2 2圖2 5 b,根據本發明的另一實施 例’ APCM及DPCM數據機2 5 2 0與2 5 6 0會分 別交換CP及MP框2552及2562。緊接在長的 C P及MP框2 5 5 2和2 5 6 2傳送之後,二數據機 2550及2560會分別切換至短的CP (CPs)及 短的MP (MPs)框2553和2563之傳送。如同 所示,D P C Μ數據機2 5 6 0會適當地接收C P框 2552。因此,爲了回應,DPCM數據機2560會 以MPS,框2564確認CP框2552。但是,另一 方面,APCM 2550無法接收MP框2562。因 此,A P C Μ數據機2 5 5 0繼續傳送具有確認設定爲「 0」之C P s框2 5 5 3,確認設定爲「0」係指Μ Ρ框 2 5 6 2尙未被接收。如同所示,D p c Μ數據機 2 5 6 0停止傳送MP s /框2 5 6 4及僅傳送一個具有 確認位元被設定(因爲C P已被接收)之長的Μ P,亦即 ΜΡ /。在某些實施例中,DPCM數據機2 5 6 0可繼 續傳送更多Μ P /框。但是,在圖2 5 b的實施例中,在 僅傳送一 Μ P /框之後,D P C Μ數據機2 5 6 0開始傳 送Μ P s >框2 5 6 4。同時’由於其收到作爲確認之 MPs /框2564,所以,APCM數據機2550繼 續傳送短的C P框2 5 5 3。最後,A P c Μ數據機 2 5 5 0從DP CM數據機2 5 6 0接收長的MP框 2 5 6 5且數據機移至資料階段。如同參考圖2 5 a所述 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) -82 _ --I--I I I I--------r I--訂--I-----•線 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) A7 ---------— R7_____ 五、發明說明(80 ) 可由APCM或DPcm數據機2 5 5 0或2 5 6 0利 (請先閱讀背面之注音3事項再填寫本頁) 用3者如上述之不同方法或預定條件以決定傳送短框之後何 時傳送長框。 圖2 5 c係顯示本發明的一實施例,其可倂入或配合 ITU建議V. 92使用。根據圖25c,APCM及 D P CM數據機2 5 8 〇及2 5 9 0會分別交換c P和 CPa框2582和2592。緊接在長的CP及CPa 框2 5 8 2和2 5 9 2的傳送之後,二數據機2 5 8 0及 2 5 9 0會分別開始傳送短的cp (CP s )及短的 CPa (CPas)框 2583 和 2593。如同所示, DP CM數據機2 5 9 0會適當地接收CP框2 5 8 2。 爲了回應,DPCM數據機2590會以CPa s -框 2594確認CP框2582。但是,另一方面, 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 APCM 2580無法接收CPa框2592。因此, A P C Μ數據機2 5 8 0繼續傳送具有確認設定爲「〇」 之C P s框2 5 8 3,確認設定爲「0」係指C P a 2 5 9 2框尙未被接收。如同所示,D P C Μ數據機 2 5 9 0停止傳送c P a s /框2 5 9 4及取代地開始傳 送具有確認位元被設定(因爲CP已被接收)之長的 CPa框2595,亦即CPa /。如同所示,在本實施 例中,DP CM數據機2 5 9 〇可傳送多於一的CP a 一 框。但是,在其它實施例中’僅有一個C P a /會被傳送 且DPCM數據機2 5 9 0可切回至傳送CPa s -。同 時,由於其收到作爲確認之C P a s /框2 5 9 4,所以 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)_ 83 - 499809 Α7 _____ Β7 五、發明說明(81 ) ,AP CM數據機2 5 8 0繼續傳送短的CP框2 5 8 3 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 。最後’ A P C Μ數據機2 5 8 0從D P C Μ數據機 2 5 9 0接收長的C P a框2 5 9 5且數據機移至資料階 段。此處在決定傳送短框之後何時再傳送長框時,可利用 如上所述之觸發事件或條件。 圖2 6係顯示本發明的另一實施例,根據本實施例, 實際上可更快地達成數據機之間的速率協商。圖2 6係顯 示AP CM數據機2 6 1 0與DP CM數據機2 6 2 0之 間的速率再協商交換處理。如同所示,在數據機啓動訓練 期間所使用的類似參數交換處理可用於交換Μ P、C P及 C P a。圖2 6的實施例係顯示根據I T U建議V · 9 0 之速率再協商處理。但是,相同的觀念可應用至V · 3 4 及V · 9 2再協商。圖2 6係顯示由AP CM數據機 2 6 1 0發啓的速率再協商。如同所示,數據機2 6 1 0 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 及2 6 2 0分別交換長的CP及MP框2 6 1 2和 2 6 2 2。之後,數據機2 6 1 0及2 6 1 2分別開始傳 送短的CP (CPs)及短的MP (MPs)框2613 及2 6 2 3。根據本實施例,APCM數據機2 6 1 0首 先接收Μ P框2 6 2 2,且爲了回應,在確認時會傳送 CPs /框2614給DPCM數據機2620。另一方 面,DPCM數據機26 20會接收CP框26 1 2且在 確認時會傳送Μ P s /框2 6 2 3。在此階段,二數據機 2 6 1 0及2 6 2 0會快速地繼續進行至資料階段。由於 傳送短的C Ρ及Μ Ρ框之結果,數據機2 6 1 0及 -84- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 499809 A7 B7 五、發明說明(82 ) 2 6 2 0能夠更加快速地完成速率再協商。 圖2 7係用以改進快速訓練速度之本發明的另一實施 例。圖2 7係顯示AP CM數據機2 7 1 0與DP CM數 據機2 7 2 0之間的快速訓練處理。在快速訓練處理期間 ’參數交換也會用於交換MP、 CP及CPa。圖27的 貫施例係顯示根據I T U建議V · 9 0之快速訓練處理。 但是’其也可應用至V · 3 4及V · 9 2快速訓練。圖 2 7係顯示由a P C Μ數據機2 7 1 0啓動的快速訓練處 理。如同所示,數據機2 7 1 0及2 7 2 0會分別交換長 的CP及ΜΡ框27 12和272 2。緊接著,二數據機 2 7 1 〇及2 7 1 2分別開始傳送短的C P ( C P s )及 短的Μ Ρ ( Μ P s )框2 7 1 3及2 7 2 3。爲回應收到 爐?框2722,APCM數據機2710會傳送 c P s /框2 7 1 4給D P C Μ數據機2 7 2 0以確認收 到。另一方面,DPCM數據機27 20會接收0?框 2 7 1 2及於確認時傳送Μ P s /框2 7 2 4。在成功的 快速參數交換之後,數據機2 7 1 0及2 7 2 0繼續進行 至資料階段。由於傳送短的C Ρ及Μ Ρ框的結果,可以以 較少的時間及更有效率地取得快速訓練。 圖2 8係顯示本發明的短參數框與諸如快速連接處理 等本發明的其它不同觀點相結合。圖2 8係顯示根據本發 明的一觀點之快速連接處理。如同所示,快速連接處理包 含本發明之短C Ρ和ΜΡ框的使用。圖2 8係顯示 APCM數據機2 8 1 0與DPCM數據機28 20之間 (請先閲讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) - I I l· I 1 I 訂-— — — — — —--. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -85- A7 ^___B7 _ 五、發明說明(83 ) 的快速連接處理。在快速連接期間,取決於用於交換之數 據標準,M p、c P及C P a框會在數據機之間交換。圖 2 8的實施例係顯示根據I T U建議V . 9 0之快速連接 Μ旦是’相同的交換可應用至V . 3 4及V · 9 2快速連 ί妾設計。如同所示,數據機2 8 1 0及2 8 2 0會分別交 換長的CP及ΜΡ框28 12及2822。緊接著,數據 機2 8 1 〇及2 8 1 2分別開始傳送短的C P ( C P s ) 及短的MP (MPs)框2813及2823。爲回應收 到MP框2822,APCM數據機2810會傳送 c P s /框2 8 1 4給D P C Μ數據機2 8 2 0以確認此 接收。另一方面,D P C Μ數據機2 8 2 0會接收C Ρ框 2 8 1 2及於確認時傳送Μ P s /框2 8 2 4。在成功的 快速參數交換之後,數據機2 7 1 0及2 7 2 0繼續進行 至資料階段。結果,藉由採用二數據機之間快速的參數交 換,本發明的快速連接時間可以減少更多。 當以軟體實施時,本發明的至少一些元件可爲電腦資 料的形式,包含但並不侷限於任何位元資訊、碼、等等。 資料可以以位元組或資料區段的方式配置且可儲存於處理 器可讀取之介質中或於傳送介質或通訊鏈結上由嵌入於載 波中的資料訊號傳送。舉例而言,C P a框中的位元資訊 可*形成由嵌入於載波中的資料訊號傳送之不同的資料區段 。通訊鏈結包含但不侷限於電話線、數據機連接、網際網 路連接、整合服務數位網路(1 s D N )連接、不同步傳 輸模式(A T Μ )連接、框延遲連接、以太網I路連接、同 紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 7〇〇~ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ----:----訂----- I--· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A7 _— _B7 五、發明說明(84 ) 軸連接、光纖連接、衛星連接(舉例而言,數位衛星服務 、_等)、無線連接、射頻(R F )鏈結、電磁鏈結、雙 向通話連接、等等、及其組合。「處理器可讀取介質」包 含能儲存或傳送資訊之任何介質。處理器可讀取介質的實 施例包含電子電路、半導體記憶體裝置、R Ο Μ、快閃記 憶體、可抹拭ROM (EROM)、磁碟片、CD — ROM、光碟、硬碟、光纖介質、射頻(RF)鏈結、等 等。電腦資料訊號包含任何可在諸如電子網路頻道、光纖 、空氣、電磁、R F鏈結、等傳輸介質上傳播的訊號。可 經由諸如網際網路、內部網路等電腦網路等下載區段碼。 已於上述中參考較佳實施例說明本發明。但是,習於 此技藝者瞭解在不悖離本發明的範圍之下可改變及修改較 佳實施例。這些及其它改變或修改係被包含於如後述申請 專利範圍所述之本發明的範圍內。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I I 丨 l· — I I 訂-I I I I I I I . 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) _ 87 -V. Description of the invention (78) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 2 5 2 2 Not received. In these cases, according to an embodiment of the present invention, the D P c M modem 2 5 2 0 starts to transmit the long MP frame again. Since the D pc Μ modem 2 5 2 0 has received the MP box 2 5 1 2, the new long MP boxes 2 5 2 5 transmitted by the D pc Μ modem 2 5 2 0 will have their acknowledged bits Yuan is set to "1". In other words, since the short frame does not contain all the required parameters, the DPCM data machine 2520 starts transmitting the MP > frame. In some embodiments, the DP CM modem 2520 may transmit only one MP > box 2525 and then switch to transmitting MPs / box 2524 (for example, FIG. 25b). When deciding when to transmit a longer MP frame after a period of time to transmit a short MP frame, the DP CP modem 2 5 2 0 can use different conditions, events or methods. In an embodiment, if the modem 2 5 2 0 or 2 5 1 0 completes its own long MP frame transmission, the DP CM modem 2 5 2 0 or the AP CM modem 2 5 1 0 receives a round trip. If there is more delay at the beginning of the MP or MP frame, the modem 2520 or 2510 may start to transmit the long MP frame again. In another embodiment, before the long MP frame is transmitted again, additional time such as 20-30 ms can be added to the round-trip delay time to allow detection delay. Those skilled in the art are familiar with the calculation of round-trip delay. In some embodiments, when deciding when the modem should send out a long MP frame again after sending out a short MP frame, a fixed amount of time may be used as the pause time. In yet another embodiment, a predetermined event may be utilized, for example, the number of short MP frames transmitted by a modem that is waiting for confirmation. For example, if the AP CM modem 2 5 1 0 transmits three MPs but does not receive a confirmation, then APC M (please read the note 2 on the back before filling this page)--ϋ II ϋ ϋ I: OJ nnn 线 line · This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -81-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 499809 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (79) The modem 2 5 10 will transmit another MP box. Now referring to 2 2 2 and FIG. 2 5 b, according to another embodiment of the present invention, the APCM and DPCM modems 2 5 2 0 and 2 5 60 will exchange CP and MP frames 2552 and 2562, respectively. Immediately after the long CP and MP frames 2 5 5 2 and 2 5 6 2 are transmitted, the two modems 2550 and 2560 will switch to the short CP (CPs) and short MP (MPs) frames 2553 and 2563 respectively. . As shown, the DPCM 2560 will properly receive the CP box 2552. Therefore, in response, the DPCM modem 2560 will confirm the CP block 2552 with MPS, block 2564. However, on the other hand, the APCM 2550 cannot receive the MP box 2562. Therefore, the AP PC modem 2 5 50 continues to transmit the CP box 2 5 5 3 with the confirmation setting "0", and the confirmation setting "0" means that the MP frame 2 5 6 2 6 has not been received. As shown, the D pc Μ modem 2 560 stops transmitting MP s / box 2 564 and transmits only one long MP with a confirmation bit set (because the CP has been received), ie MP / . In some embodiments, the DPCM modem 2560 can continue to transmit more MP / boxes. However, in the embodiment of Fig. 25b, after transmitting only one MP / box, the DP PC modem 2560 starts transmitting MPs > box 2564. At the same time, since it received the MPs / box 2564 as a confirmation, the APCM modem 2550 continues to transmit the short CP box 2 5 5 3. Finally, the AP PC modem 2 550 receives the long MP box 2 565 from the DP CM modem 2 560 and the modem moves to the data phase. As described with reference to Figure 2 5a, this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) -82 _ --I--III I -------- r I--order --I ----- • line (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) A7 ---------— R7_____ V. Description of the invention (80) Available by APCM or DPcm modem 2 5 5 0 or 2 5 6 0 (please read the note 3 on the back before filling out this page) Use the 3 different methods or predetermined conditions as described above to decide when to send the long frame after the short frame. Figure 2c shows an embodiment of the present invention, which can be incorporated into or used in conjunction with ITU Recommendation V. 92. According to Fig. 25c, the APCM and DPCM modems 2580 and 2590 will exchange cP and CPa boxes 2582 and 2592, respectively. Immediately after the transmission of the long CP and CPa frames 2 5 8 2 and 2 5 9 2, the two modems 2 5 0 0 and 2 5 9 0 will start transmitting short cp (CP s) and short CPa ( CPas) Boxes 2583 and 2593. As shown, the DP CM modem 2 59 0 will properly receive the CP box 2 5 8 2. In response, the DPCM modem 2590 confirms the CP box 2582 with CPa s-box 2594. However, on the other hand, the APCM 2580 printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs cannot receive the CPa box 2592. Therefore, the AP modem 2 5 8 0 continues to transmit the C P s frame 2 5 8 3 with the confirmation setting "0", and the confirmation setting "0" means that the C P a 2 5 9 2 frame has not been received. As shown, the DPC M modem 2 59 0 stops transmitting c P as / box 2 5 9 4 and instead starts transmitting a long CPa box 2595 with a confirmation bit set (because the CP has been received), that is, CPa /. As shown, in this embodiment, the DP CM modem 2 590 can transmit more than one CP a frame. However, in other embodiments, 'only one C P a / will be transmitted and the DPCM modem 2 590 can switch back to transmitting C Pa s-. At the same time, since it received the CP as / box 2 5 9 4 as a confirmation, this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) _ 83-499809 Α7 _____ Β7 V. Description of the invention ( 81), AP CM modem 2 5 8 0 continues to transmit short CP box 2 5 8 3 (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page). Finally ‘A P C M modem 2 580 receives a long C P a box 2 5 95 from D P C M modem 2 590 and the modem moves to the data phase. When deciding when to transmit a long frame after transmitting a short frame here, the trigger event or condition as described above can be used. FIG. 26 shows another embodiment of the present invention. According to this embodiment, the rate negotiation between the data machines can be actually achieved faster. Figure 26 shows the rate renegotiation exchange processing between AP CM modem 2610 and DP CM modem 2620. As shown, similar parameter exchange processes used during modem startup training can be used to exchange MP, CP, and CPa. The embodiment of FIG. 26 shows a renegotiation process based on the I T U recommendation V · 90 rate. However, the same concepts can be applied to V · 3 4 and V · 9 2 renegotiation. Figure 26 shows the rate renegotiation initiated by the AP CM modem 2610. As shown, the modem 2 6 10 is printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and 2 6 2 0 exchanges the long CP and MP boxes 2 6 1 2 and 2 6 2 2 respectively. After that, the modems 2 6 10 and 2 6 1 2 start transmitting short CP (CPs) and short MP (MPs) frames 2613 and 2 6 2 3 respectively. According to this embodiment, the APCM modem 2 6 10 first receives the MP frame 2 6 2 2 and, in response, sends CPs / frame 2614 to the DPCM modem 2620 in response to the confirmation. On the other hand, the DPCM modem 26 20 will receive the CP box 26 1 2 and will transmit MPs / box 2 6 2 3 upon confirmation. At this stage, the two modems 2610 and 2620 will quickly continue to the data stage. As a result of transmitting short CP and MP frames, the modems 2 6 1 0 and -84- This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 499809 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ( 82) 2 6 2 0 can complete rate renegotiation more quickly. Fig. 27 is another embodiment of the present invention for improving fast training speed. Figure 7 shows the fast training process between the AP CM modem 2710 and the DP CM modem 2720. The parameter exchange during fast training processing is also used to exchange MP, CP and CPa. The example in FIG. 27 shows a fast training process according to I T U recommendation V · 90. But it can also be applied to V · 34 and V · 9 2 fast training. Figure 27 shows the fast training process initiated by a PCM data machine 2710. As shown, the modems 2710 and 2720 exchange long CP and MP boxes 27 12 and 272 2 respectively. Immediately afterwards, the two modems 2710 and 2712 started to transmit short CP (CPs) and short MP (MPs) frames 2 7 1 3 and 2 7 2 3, respectively. Received a furnace in response? Block 2722, the APCM modem 2710 will transmit c P s / box 2 7 1 4 to the D PC M modem 2 7 2 0 to confirm receipt. On the other hand, the DPCM modem 27 20 will receive 0 frames 2 7 1 2 and will transmit MPs / frame 2 7 2 4 upon confirmation. After a successful fast parameter exchange, the modems 2710 and 2720 continue to the data phase. As a result of transmitting short CP and MP boxes, fast training can be obtained in less time and more efficiently. Fig. 28 shows the short parameter box of the present invention combined with other different viewpoints of the present invention such as fast connection processing. Fig. 28 shows a fast connection process according to an aspect of the present invention. As shown, the quick connect process includes the use of short CP and MP boxes of the present invention. Figure 2 8 shows between APCM modem 2 8 1 0 and DPCM modem 28 20 (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page)-II l · I 1 I Order -— — — — — — -. Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -85- A7 ^ ___ B7 _ V. Quick connection processing of the invention description (83) . During the fast connection, the M p, c P, and C P a boxes are exchanged between modems depending on the data standard used for the exchange. The embodiment of FIG. 28 shows the fast connection of V.90 according to I T U recommendation. Once the M 'is the same exchange, it can be applied to V.34 and V.92 fast connection designs. As shown, the modems 28 1 0 and 2 8 2 0 will exchange the long CP and MP boxes 28 12 and 2822, respectively. Immediately afterwards, the modems 2810 and 2812 started transmitting short CP (C Ps) and short MP (MPs) frames 2813 and 2823, respectively. In response to receiving the MP box 2822, the APCM modem 2810 will send c P s / box 2 8 1 4 to the D PC M modem 2 8 2 0 to confirm this reception. On the other hand, the D P C M modem 2 8 2 0 will receive the C P frame 2 8 1 2 and transmit the M P s / frame 2 8 2 4 upon confirmation. After a successful fast parameter exchange, the modems 2710 and 2720 continue to the data phase. As a result, by adopting fast parameter exchange between the two modems, the fast connection time of the present invention can be reduced even more. When implemented in software, at least some of the elements of the present invention may be in the form of computer data, including but not limited to any bit information, codes, etc. The data can be configured in bytes or data segments and can be stored in a processor-readable medium or transmitted on a transmission medium or communication link by a data signal embedded in a carrier. For example, the bit information in the C P a frame can * form different data segments transmitted by the data signal embedded in the carrier wave. Communication links include but are not limited to telephone lines, modem connections, Internet connections, integrated services digital network (1 s DN) connections, asynchronous transmission mode (AT M) connections, frame delay connections, Ethernet I channels The connection and the same paper size apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 7〇00 ~ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) --- I-- · Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A7 __ _B7 V. Description of the invention (84) Shaft connection, fiber optic connection, satellite connection (for example, digital satellite service, _, etc.), Wireless connections, radio frequency (RF) links, electromagnetic links, two-way call connections, etc., and combinations thereof. "Processor-readable media" includes any medium capable of storing or transmitting information. Examples of processor-readable media include electronic circuits, semiconductor memory devices, ROMs, flash memory, erasable ROM (EROM), magnetic disks, CD-ROMs, optical disks, hard disks, fiber optic media , Radio frequency (RF) links, and more. Computer data signals include any signal that can be transmitted on transmission media such as electronic network channels, optical fibers, air, electromagnetic, RF links, and the like. It can be downloaded via computer networks, such as the Internet and Intranet. The invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, those skilled in the art understand that the preferred embodiment can be changed and modified without departing from the scope of the present invention. These and other changes or modifications are included in the scope of the present invention as described in the scope of the patent application described later. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) II 丨 l · — II Order-IIIIIII. Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) %) _ 87-

Claims (1)

499809 煩讀委員明示『年>月;^日所提>》_____ 修正本有無tii?J實質内客是否准予修Ή I經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8、申請專利範圍 附件一:第89 1 1 81 59號專利申請案 中文申請專利範圍修正本 民國91年2月修正 1 . 一種第一裝置與第二裝置之間的通訊方法,該方 法包括下述步驟: 由該第一裝置傳送具有第一長度及第一定義之第一資 訊序列; 從該第二裝置接收具有第二長度及第二定義之第二資 訊序列; ' 由該第一裝置傳送具有第三長度及第三定義之第三資 訊序列;及 從該第二裝置接收具有第四長度及第四定義之第四資 訊序列; 其中,該第三定義包括第三確認標示器和第四定義包 括第四確認標示器,其中第三確認標示器由第一裝置所調 整以標示第二框之接收,和其中第四確認標示器由第一裝 置檢查以決定第二裝置是否接收第一框,和其中該第三長 度小於該第一長度及該第四長度小於該第二長度。 ' 2 ·如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該第一定義 與該第二定義相同且該第二定義與該第四定義相同。 3 ..如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該第一長度 與該第二長度相同且該第三長度與該第四長度相同。 4 .如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該第一及第 三資訊序列均包含型式部份,且其中該型式部份區別該第499809 The members of the annoying reading stated clearly that "year >month; ^ date mentioned >" _____ Is there a revised version of t_J? Is it true that internal customers are allowed to repair I Printed by A8, B8, C8, D8, Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Patent Application Scope Annex 1: Patent Application No. 89 1 1 81 59 Chinese Patent Application Amendment Amendment February 1991 1. A communication method between a first device and a second device, the method includes the following steps: The first device transmits a first information sequence having a first length and a first definition; a second information sequence having a second length and a second definition is received from the second device; And a third information sequence with a third definition; and receiving a fourth information sequence with a fourth length and a fourth definition from the second device; wherein the third definition includes a third confirmation indicator and the fourth definition includes a fourth A confirmation marker, wherein the third confirmation marker is adjusted by the first device to mark the reception of the second frame, and the fourth confirmation marker is checked by the first device to determine whether the second device receives A frame, and wherein the third length is less than the first length and the second length is smaller than the fourth length. '2 · The method of claim 1 in the scope of patent application, wherein the first definition is the same as the second definition and the second definition is the same as the fourth definition. 3. The method of claim 1 in the scope of patent application, wherein the first length is the same as the second length and the third length is the same as the fourth length. 4. The method according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first and third information sequences both include a pattern part, and wherein the pattern part distinguishes the first (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -裝_ 、π 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ297公釐) 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 一及該第三資訊序列。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 5 .如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該第一資訊 序列係Μ P框且該第三資訊序列係Μ P s框。 6 ·如申請專利範圍第5項之方法,其中該第二資訊 序列係Μ Ρ框且該第四資訊序列係Μ P s框。 7 ·如申請專利範圍第5項之方法,其中該第二資訊 序列係C P框且該第四資訊序列係C Ρ δ框。 8 _如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該第一資訊 序列係C P框且該第三資訊序列係C P s框。 · 9 ·如申請專利範圍第8項之方法,其中該第二資訊 序列係C P a框且該第四資訊序列係C p a s框。 1 〇 ·如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該方法作 爲該裝置之間快速串列握手的部份。 1 1 ·如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該方法作 爲該裝置之間快速連接握手的部份。 1 2 ·如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該方法作 爲該裝置之間速率協商握手的部份。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1 3 ·如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該方法作 爲該裝置之間啓動握手的部份。 1 4 · 一種通訊方法,包括下述步驟: 傳送具有第一及第二資訊定義部份之長資訊序列;及 傳送具有該第一資訊定義部份之短資訊序列; 其中該第一資訊定義部份包含區別該第一及第二資訊 序列之型式部份,該第一資訊定義部份進一步包括可使用 Z紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS )八4祕(21GX297公慶) 一〇 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 __ D8六、申請專利範圍 以確認一接收資訊序列之確認標示器。 1 5 ·如申請專利範圍第1 4項之方法,其中該長資 訊序列係Μ P框且該短資訊序列係Μ P s。 1 δ ·如申請專利範圍第1 4項之方法,其中該長資 訊序列係C Ρ框且該短資訊序列係c P s。 1 7 ·如申請專利範圍第1 4項之方法,其中該長資 訊序列係C P a框且該短資訊序列係c P a s。 1 8 · —種通訊方法,包括下述步驟: 接收具有第一及第二資訊定義部份之長資訊序列;·及 接收具有該第一資訊定義部份之短資訊序列; 其中該第一資訊定義部份包含區別該第一及第二資訊 序列之型式部份,該第一資訊定義部份進一步包括可使用 以決定所傳送資訊序列之接收之一確認標示器。 1 9 ·如申請專利範圍第1 8項之方法,其中該長資 訊序列係Μ P框且該短資訊序列係Μ P s。 2 0 ·如申請專利範圍第1 8項之方法,其中該長資 訊序列係C Ρ框且該短資訊序列係C P s。 2 1 ·如申請專利範圍第1 8項之方法,其中該長資 訊序列係C P a框且該短資訊序列係C P a s。 2 2 · —種嵌入於載波中的資料訊號'該資料訊號包 括·· 第一部份,包括: 第一同步資料區段; 第一啓始資料區段接在第一同步資料區段後; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) ΓβΤ~ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) _> 裝· 訂 Ρ 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8六、申請專利範圍 長框標記資料區段接在第一啓始資料區段後; 第一確認資料區段接在長框標記資料區段後; 第二啓始資料區段接在第一確認資料區段後·, 多個參數資料區段接在第二啓始資料區段後; 第三啓始資料區段接在多數參數資料區段後; 第一 C R c資料區段接在第三啓始資料區段後; 第二部份接在第一部份後,該第二部份包括: 第二同步資料區段; 第四啓始資料區段接在第二同步資料區段後厂 短框標記資料區段接在第四啓始資料區段後; 第二確認資料區段接在短框標記資料區段後; 第五啓始資料區段接在第二確認資料區段後;及 第二C R C資料區段接在第五啓始資料區段後; 其中該第一和第二確認資料區段可使用以確認一接收資料 訊號。 2 3 .如申請專利範圍第2 2項之資料訊號,其中該 資料訊號包含MP框及MP s框。 2 4 .如申請專利範圍第2 2項之資料訊號,其中該 資料訊號包含C P框及C P s框。 2 5 .如申請專利範圍第2 2項之資料,訊號,其中該 資料訊號包含CP a框及CP a s框。 2 6 .如申請專利範圍第2 2項之資料訊號,其中該 資料訊號包含Μ P /E框及Μ P s >框。 27.—種通訊裝置,包括: 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ297公嫠) _ 4 - ---------AWI ^-- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、?τ 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 、申請專利乾圍 接收器,能夠接收具有第一長度及第一定義之第一資 訊序列,跟隨在該第一資訊序列之後的是具有第二長度及 第二定義之第二資訊序列;及 傳送器,能夠傳送具有第三長度及第三定義之第三資 訊序列,跟隨在該第三資訊序列之後的是具有第四長度及 第四定義之第四資訊序列;及 其中每一定義包括一確認標示器,該第四資訊序列之 確認標示器由該傳送器所調整以在該接收器接收第一資訊 序列時標示第一資訊序列之接收,和其中第二資訊序列之 確認標示器由該接收器檢查以決定是否確認第三資訊序列 之接收,和其中該第二長度小於該第一長度及該第四長度 小於該第三長度。 2 8 .如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該第一 長度與該第三長度相同且該第二長度與該第四長度相同。 2 9 .如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該第一 定義與該第三定義相同且該第二定義與該第四定義相同。 3 〇 .如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該接收 器會在預定時間內接收具有第五長度及第五定義之第五資 訊序列。 3 1 .如申請專利範圍第3 0項之裝置/其中該第五 長度與該第二長度相同且該第五定義與該第二定義相同。 3 2 .如申請專利範圍第3 0項之裝置,其中該第五 定義包含確認標示器,其標示收到該第三資訊序列。 3 3 .如申請專利範圍第3 2項之裝置,其中該第五 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210 X 297公釐) _ ς __ 11!_- — 丨丨·1 裝^— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、?! 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 資訊序列係Μ P s,。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 3 4 ·如申請專利範圍第3 2項之裝置,其中該第五 資訊序列係C P s -。 3 5 ·如申請專利範圍第3 2項之裝置,其中該第五 資訊序列係C P a s —。 3 6 ·如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該接收 器無法在預定時間內接收用於該第三資訊序列之確認,且 該傳送器會傳送具有第五長度及第五定義之第五資訊序列 〇 3 7 ·如申請專利範圍第3 6項之裝置,其中該第五 長度等於該第三長度且該第五定義與該第三定義相同。 3 8 ·如申請專利範圍第3 6項之裝置,其中該傳送 器又會傳送具有該第四長度及該第四定義之第六資訊序列 〇 3 9 .如申請專利範圍第3 6項之裝置,其中該傳送 器又會傳送具有該第三長度及該第三定義之第六資訊序列 〇 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 0 ·如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該第三 資訊序列係Μ P。 4 1 ·如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,,其中該第四 資訊序列係Μ P s。 4 2 _如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該第三 資訊序列係C Ρ。 4 3 ·如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該第四 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐)^- 6 一 " 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8六、申請專利範圍 資訊序列係C P S。 4 4 _如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該第三 資訊序列係C P a 〇 4 5 .如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該第四 資訊序列係C P a s。 4 6 ·如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該接收 器在預定事件或條件之內無法接收用於該第三資訊序列之 確認,及該傳送器傳送具有第五長度及第五定義之第五資 訊序列。 · 4 7 . —種通訊方法,包括下述步驟: 傳送具有第一長度及第一定義之至少一第一資訊序列 ;及 傳送具有第二長度及第二定義之第二資訊序列; 其中該第一長度比該第二長度還短,和其中該第一定 義包括一型式部份用以辨認第一和第二資訊序列,該第一 並行部份進一步包括一確認標示器,其使用以確認所接收 之資訊序列。 4 8 ·如申請專利範圍第4 7項之方法,其中該第一 資訊序列係C P s且該第二資訊序列係C P。 4 9 ·如申請專利範圍第4 7項之方法,,其中該第一 資訊序列係C P a s且該第二資訊序列係C P a。. 5 0 · —種嵌入於載波中的資料訊號,該資料訊號包 括: 第一部份,包括: 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準( CNS ) A4規格(210X297公董) ~Γ "一 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) kr 裝· 訂 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 、申請專利乾圍 第一同步資料區段; 第一啓始資料區段接在第一同步資料區段後; 第一框標記資料區段接在第一啓始資料區段後; 第一確認資料區段接在第一框標記資料區段後; 第二啓始資料區段接在第一確認資料區段後; 第一 C R C資料區段接在第二啓始資料區段後; 第二部份接在第一部份後,該第二部份包括: 第二同步資料區段; 第三啓始資料區段接在第二同步資料區段後「 第二框標記資料區段接在第三啓始資料區段後; 第二確認資料區段接在第二框標記資料區段後; 第四啓始資料區段接在第二確認資料區段後; 多數參數資料區段接在第四啓始資料區段後; 第五啓始資料區段接在多數參數資料區段後;及 第二C R C資料區段接在第五啓始資料區段後; 其中該第二框標記區段標示該多個參數資料區段跟隨在後 ,和該第一和第二確認資料區段可使用以確認一接收資料 訊號。 ‘ 5 1 · —種通訊裝置,包括: 接收器,能夠接收具有第一長度及第一定義之第一資 訊序列,跟隨在該第一資訊序列之後的是具有第二長度及 第二定義之第二資訊序列; 其中,該第一長度比該第二長度還長,和每一定義包 i 括一確認標示器,其中每一確認標示器可受檢查以決定所 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) β (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -裝- 訂 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 傳送之資訊序列之接收。 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 5 2 ·如申請專利範圍第5 1項之裝置,又包括 傳送器,能夠傳送具有第三長度及第三定義之第三資 訊序列,跟隨在該第三資訊序列之後的是具有第四長度及 第四定義之第四資訊序列; 其中,該第三長度比該第四長度還長。 5 3 .如申請專利範圍第5 1項之裝置,其中該第一 資訊序列係C P a且該第二資訊序列係C P a s。 5 4 ·如申請專利範圍第2 7項之裝置,其中該第一 資訊序列係C P a s且該第二資訊序列係c P a。 5 5 · —種串列方法,用以第二裝置串列第一裝置, 該串列方法包含: 藉由第一裝置傳送第一資訊序列至第二裝置,該第一 資訊序列具有第一型標示器和多數第一串列參數; 從第二裝置以第一裝置接收第二資訊序列,該第二資 訊序列具有第二型標示器和多數第二串列參數; 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 以第一裝置傳送第三資訊序列至第二裝置,該第三資 訊序列具有第三型標示器,第三確認標示器,其中該第三 資訊序列短於第一資訊序列;和 從第二裝置以第一裝置接收第四資訊序I列,該第四資 訊序列具有第四型標示器,第四確認標示器,其中該第四 資訊序列短於第二資訊序列; 其中該第三確認標示器由第一裝置所調整以在該第一 裝置接收第二資訊序列時標示第二資訊序列之接收,和其 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) Τ〇Ί 499809 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8六、申請專利乾圍 中第四確認標示器由該第一裝置檢查以決定第二裝置是否 接收第一資訊序列。 5 6 ·如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,進一步包含 :重覆的傳送第三資訊序列一段預定期間,直到第四確認 標示器標示由第二裝置之接收第一資訊序列。 5 7 ·如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,進一步包含 :如果第四確認標示器未標示由第二裝置之接收第一資訊 序列時,在該預定期間過去後,傳送第一資訊序列。 5 8 ·如申請專利範圍第5 7項之方法,進一步包含 :重覆的傳送第三資訊序列一段預定期間,直到第四確認 標示器標示由第二裝置之接收第一資訊序列。 5 9 .如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,進一步包含 :重覆的接收第四資訊序列一段預定期間,直到第三確認 標示器標示由第一裝置之接收第二資訊序列。 6 0 .如申請專利範圍第5 9項之方法,進一步包含 :如果第二確認標示器未標示由第一裝置之接收第二資訊 序列時,在該預定期間過去後,接收第二資訊序列。 6 1 ·如申請專利範圍第6 0項之方法,進一步包含 :重覆的接收第四資訊序列一段預定期間,直到第三確認 標示器標示由第一裝置之接收第二資訊序列,。 6 2 .如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,其中該第一 型標示器標示第一資訊序列比由第三型標示器所標示之第 三資訊序列長。 6 3 ·如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,其中該第二 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) -- ---------m-裝— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ,tT 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 型標示器標示第二資訊序列比由第四型標示器所標示之第 四資訊序列長。 6 4 ·如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,其中該第一 資訊序列爲Μ P框,和其中該第三資訊序列爲μ P s框。 6 5 ·如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,其中該第一 資訊序列爲C Ρ框,和其中該第三資訊序列爲c p s框。 6 6 ·如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,其中該第一 資訊序列爲C P a框,和其中該第三資訊序列爲C p a $ 框。 · 6 7 ·如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,其中該第二 資訊序列爲Μ P框,和其中該第四資訊序列爲μ P s框。: 6 8 ·如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,其中該第二 資訊序列爲C Ρ框,和其中該第四資訊序列爲c p s框。 6 9 .如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,其中該第二 資訊序列爲C P a框,和其中該第四資訊序列爲c p a $ 框。 7 0 · —種初始化一錯誤校正協定通訊之方法,其使 用在一資料相中,在介於第一裝置和第二裝置間之串列相 時,該通訊方法包含之步驟爲: 執行該串列相之初始串列部份; | 傳送一或多個參數,其可使用以建立該錯誤校正協定 ,當成在初始串列後之該串列相之一部份; 結束該串列相; 輸入該資料相; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝· 、π 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 使用一或多個參數建立該錯誤校正協定;和| 使用該錯誤校正協定接收資料。 7 1 ·如申請專利範圍第7 0項之方法,其中該錯言吳 校正協定包括一資料壓縮協定。 7 2 ·如申請專利範圍第7 0項之方法,其中該纟音吳 校正協定爲V · 4 2協定,和其中在該傳送步驟時傳送與 V · 4 2 X I D訊號相似之訊號。 7 3 ·如申請專利範圍第7 0項之方法,其中該串列 相實質相似於V . 9 0串列。 ‘ 7 4 ·如申請專利範圍第7 0項之方法,其中一或多 個參數傳送當成C P t訊號之一部份。 7 5 ·如申請專利範圍第7 0項之方法,其中一或多 個參數傳送當成C P訊號之一部份。 7 6 .如申請專利範圍第7 0項之方法,其中一或多 個參數傳送當成C P s訊號之一部份。 7 7 ·如申請專利範圍第7 0項之方法,其中一或多 個參數傳送當成C P a訊號之一部份。 7 8 ·如申請專利範圍第7 0項之方法,其中一或多 個參數傳送當成Μ P訊號之一部份。 7 9 . —種初始化一錯誤校正協定通訊.之第一裝置, 其使用在一資料相中,在與第二二裝置之串列相時.,該裝 置包含: 一處理器,其執行該串列相之初始串列部份; 一傳送器,傳送一或多個參數,其可使用以建立該錯 本紙張尺度適用中國國家樣準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐) _ 12 - ----- - ---- I (請先閎讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 誤校正協定,當成在初始串列後之該串列相之一部份;和 一接收器, 其中該處理器結束該串列相,輸入該資料相,和使用 一或多個參數建立該錯誤校正協定,和其中該接收企使用 該錯誤校正協定接收資料。 8 〇 ·如申請專利範圍第7 9項之裝置,其中該錯誤 校正協定包括一資料壓縮協定。 8 1 .如申請專利範圍第7 9項之裝置,其中該錯誤 校正協定爲V · 4 2協定,和其中在該傳送步驟時傳送與 V . 4 2 X I D訊號相似之訊號。 8 2 .如申請專利範圍第7 9項之裝置,其中該串列 相實質相似於V · 9 0串列。 8 3 .如申請專利範圍第7 9項之裝置,其中一或多 個參數傳送當成C P t訊號之一部份。 8 4 .如申請專利範圍第7 9項之裝置,其中一或多 個參數傳送當成C P訊號之一部份。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 I I !| I I - —^_wl I I (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 8 5 .如申請專利範圍第7 9項之裝置,其中一或多 個參數傳送當成.C P s訊號之一部份。 8 6 ·如申請專利範圍第7 9項之裝置,其中一或多 個參數傳送當成C P a訊號之一部份。 / 8 7 ·如申請專利範圍第7 9項之裝置,其中一或多 個參數傳送當成Μ P訊號之一部份。 8 8 .如申請專利範圍第2 2項之資料訊號,其中所 接收之資料訊號和該資料訊號之第一部份相同。 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐) _ 13 _ 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 8 9 ·如申請專利範圍第5 0項之資料訊號,其中所 接收之資料訊號和該資料訊號之第一部份相同。. 9 0 . —種通訊裝置,其可支持一串列相和一資料相 以和一遙遠裝置通訊,該通訊裝置包含: 一傳送器,其可在該串列相時傳送第一資訊序列 ,該第一資訊序列具有第一型標示器和多數第一串列參數 ,§亥傳送器進一步可在該串列相時傳送第二資訊序列,該 第三資訊序列具有第三型標示器和第三確認標示器,其中 該第三資訊序列比第一資訊序列短; · 一接收器,其可在該串列相時接收第二資訊序列 ,該第二資訊序列具有第二型標示器和多數第二串列參數 ,該接收器進一步可從第二裝置以第一裝置接收第四資訊 序列,該第四資訊序列具有第四型標示器和第四確認標示 器,其中該第四資訊序列比第二資訊序列短;和 一處理器,其可調整第三確認標示器以標示第二資訊 序列之接收至該遙遠裝置,該處理器進一步可檢查第四確 認標示器以決定該遙遠裝置是否接收第一資訊序列。 9 1 .如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中該 傳送器重覆的傳送第三資訊序列一段預定期間,直到第四 確認標示器標示由遙遠裝置之接收第一資訊,序列。 9 2 .如申請專利範圍第9 1項之通訊裝置,其中如 果第四確認標示器未標示由遙遠裝置之接收第一資訊序列 時,在該預定期間過去後,傳送器傳送第一資訊序列。 9 3 .如申請專利範圍第9 2項之通訊裝置,其中該 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) _ 14 · ---------裝-- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂 .P 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 499809 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 々、申請專利範圍 傳送器重覆的傳送第三資訊序列一段預定期間’直到第四 確認標示器標示由遙遠裝置之接收第一資訊序列。 9 4 .如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中該 接收器重覆的接收第四資訊序列一段預定期間,直到第三 確認標示器標示由處理器之接收第二資訊序列。 9 5 .如申請專利範圍第9 4項之通訊裝置,其中如 果第二確認標示器未標示由處理器之接收第二資訊序列時 ,在該預定期間過去後,該接收器接收第二資訊序列。 9 6 .如申請專利範圍第9 5項之通訊裝置,其中該 接收器重覆的接收第四資訊序列一段預定期間’直到第三 確認標示器標示由處理器之接收第二資訊序列。 9 7 .如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中該 第一型標示器標示第一資訊序列比由第三型標示器所標示 之第三資訊序列長。 9 8 .如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中該 第二型標示器標示第二資訊序列比由第四型標示器所標示 之第四資訊序列長。 9 9 .如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中該 第一資訊序列爲Μ P框,和其中該第三資訊序列爲Μ P s 框。 , 1 0 0 .如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置.,其中 該第一資訊序列爲C Ρ框,和其中該第三資訊序列爲 C P s 框。 1 〇 1 ·如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -裝· 訂 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家梂準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ297公釐) -15- 499809 A8 B8 C8 ____ _ D8 六、申請專利範圍 該第一資訊序列爲C P a框,和其中該第三資訊序列爲 。P a s 框。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 1 0 2 ·如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中 該第二資訊序列爲Μ P框,和其中該第四資訊序列爲 Μ P s 框。 1 0 3 .如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中 該第二資訊序列爲C Ρ框,和其中該第四資訊序列爲 C P s 框。 1 0 4 ·如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中 該第二資訊序列爲C P a框,和其中該第四資訊序列爲 c P a s 框。 1 0 5 ·如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中 該第一資訊序列包括多數星座參數。 1 0 6 ·如申請專利範圍第9 0項之通訊裝置,其中 該第一資訊序列包括多數調變參數。 1 0 7 .如申請專利範圍第9 1項之通訊裝置’其中 該預定期間根據一往返延遲而計算。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1 0 8 ·如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方法,其中該第 一資訊序列包括多數星座參數。 1 0 9 ·如申請專利範圍第5 5項之方,法,其中該第 一資訊序列包括多數調變參數。 1 1 0 ·如申請專利範圍第5 6項之方法,其中該預 定期間根據一往返延遲而計算。 1 1 1 ·如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該第一 -16- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 499809 A8 Βδ C8 D8 々、申請專利範圍 資訊序列包括多數星座參數。 1 1 2 .如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該第一 資訊序列包括多數調變參數。 1 1 3 .如申請專利範圍第5 0項之資料訊號,其中 該資料訊號包括一 Μ P框和一 Μ P s框。 1 1 4 .如申請專利範圍第5 0項之資料訊號,其中 該資料訊號包括一 C Ρ框和一 C P s框。 1 1 5 .如申請專利範圍第5 0項之資料訊號,其中 該資料訊號包括一 C P a框和一 C P a s框。 ’ 1 1 6 .如申請專利範圍第5 0項之資料訊號,其中 該資料訊號包括一 Μ P /框和一 Μ P s /框。 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -裝· 訂 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ297公釐) -17-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -Packing _, π This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 × 297 mm) 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 News sequence. (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 5. If the method of the first scope of the patent application, the first information sequence is the MP frame and the third information sequence is the MP frame. 6. The method according to item 5 of the scope of patent application, wherein the second information sequence is an MP frame and the fourth information sequence is an MP frame. 7. The method according to item 5 of the scope of patent application, wherein the second information sequence is a CP box and the fourth information sequence is a CP δ box. 8 _ The method according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first information sequence is a CP frame and the third information sequence is a CP frame. · 9 · The method according to item 8 of the scope of patent application, wherein the second information sequence is a C P a frame and the fourth information sequence is a C P a s frame. 1 0. The method according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the method is used as part of a fast serial handshake between the devices. 1 1 · The method according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the method is used as part of the fast connection handshake between the devices. 1 2 · The method according to item 1 of the patent application scope, wherein the method is used as part of the rate negotiation handshake between the devices. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1 3 · If the method of the scope of patent application is No. 1, the method is used as part of the handshake between the devices. 1 4 · A communication method including the following steps: transmitting a long information sequence having first and second information defining portions; and transmitting a short information sequence having the first information defining portion; wherein the first information defining portion This document includes a type part that distinguishes the first and second information sequences. The first information definition part further includes the use of Z paper standards and applicable Chinese National Standards (CNS) Eighty-fourth Secrets (21GX297 Public Celebration). Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumer cooperative prints A8 B8 C8 __ D8 VI. Patent application scope to confirm a confirmation indicator for receiving information sequence. 15 · The method according to item 14 of the scope of patent application, wherein the long information sequence is an MP frame and the short information sequence is an MPs. 1 δ · The method according to item 14 of the scope of patent application, wherein the long information sequence is a CP frame and the short information sequence is c P s. 17 · The method according to item 14 of the scope of patent application, wherein the long information sequence is a C P a frame and the short information sequence is a C P a s. 1 8 · A communication method including the following steps: receiving a long information sequence having first and second information defining portions; and receiving a short information sequence having the first information defining portions; wherein the first information The definition part includes a type part that distinguishes the first and second information sequences. The first information definition part further includes an acknowledgement marker that can be used to determine the reception of the transmitted information sequence. 19 · The method according to item 18 of the scope of patent application, wherein the long information sequence is an MP frame and the short information sequence is an MPs. 2 0. The method according to item 18 of the scope of patent application, wherein the long information sequence is a C P frame and the short information sequence is C P s. 2 1 · The method according to item 18 of the scope of patent application, wherein the long information sequence is a C P a frame and the short information sequence is a C P a s. 2 2-a kind of data signal embedded in the carrier 'The data signal includes the first part, including: the first synchronous data section; the first starting data section is connected after the first synchronous data section; This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) ΓβΤ ~ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) _ > Packing and ordering 499809 Printed by A8, Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs B8 C8 D8 VI. The patent application scope long frame marked data section is connected after the first starting data section; the first confirmation data section is connected after the long frame marked data section; the second starting data section is connected after After the first confirmation data section, multiple parameter data sections are connected after the second starting data section; the third starting data section is connected after most of the parameter data sections; the first CR c data section is connected After the third starting data section; after the second section follows the first section, the second section includes: the second synchronous data section; the fourth starting data section is connected to the second synchronous data area Duanhouchang short frame marked data section next to the fourth After the first data segment; the second confirmation data segment is connected after the short frame data segment; the fifth start data segment is connected after the second confirmation data segment; and the second CRC data segment is connected after the fifth After starting the data segment; wherein the first and second confirmation data segments can be used to confirm a received data signal. 2 3. If the data signal of item 22 of the scope of patent application, the data signal includes MP frame and MP s frame. 24. If the data signal of item 22 of the scope of patent application, the data signal includes a CP frame and a CP frame. 2 5. If the information and signal of item 22 of the scope of patent application, the data signal includes CP a box and CP a s box. 26. The data signal according to item 22 of the scope of patent application, wherein the data signal includes a MP / E frame and a MP > frame. 27.—A kind of communication device, including: This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 × 297 cm) _ 4---------- AWI ^-(Please read the precautions on the back first Fill out this page again),? Τ 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8, patent-pending receiver, capable of receiving a first information sequence with a first length and a first definition, followed by a first information sequence with a second A second information sequence having a length and a second definition; and a transmitter capable of transmitting a third information sequence having a third length and a third definition, which is followed by a third information sequence having a fourth length and a fourth definition A fourth information sequence; and each definition thereof includes a confirmation indicator, the confirmation indicator of the fourth information sequence is adjusted by the transmitter to mark the reception of the first information sequence when the receiver receives the first information sequence, And wherein the confirmation indicator of the second information sequence is checked by the receiver to determine whether to confirm the reception of the third information sequence, and wherein the second length is less than the first length and the fourth length is less than the Third length. 28. The device according to item 27 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first length is the same as the third length and the second length is the same as the fourth length. 29. The device according to item 27 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first definition is the same as the third definition and the second definition is the same as the fourth definition. 30. The device according to item 27 of the patent application scope, wherein the receiver will receive a fifth information sequence having a fifth length and a fifth definition within a predetermined time. 31. The device according to item 30 of the scope of patent application / wherein the fifth length is the same as the second length and the fifth definition is the same as the second definition. 32. The device according to item 30 of the scope of patent application, wherein the fifth definition includes a confirmation marker that indicates receipt of the third information sequence. 3 3. If the device in the scope of patent application No. 32, in which the fifth paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) _ ς __ 11! _- — 丨 丨 1 pack ^ — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page),?! Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. The patent application information series is MPs. (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 3 4 · If the device in the 32nd patent application scope, the fifth information sequence is C P s-. 3 5 · The device according to item 32 of the scope of patent application, wherein the fifth information sequence is C P a s —. 3 6 · If the device in the scope of patent application No. 27, the receiver cannot receive the confirmation for the third information sequence within a predetermined time, and the transmitter will send the first with the fifth length and the fifth definition Fifth information sequence 03. The device according to item 36 of the patent application scope, wherein the fifth length is equal to the third length and the fifth definition is the same as the third definition. 38. If the device of the scope of patent application 36, the transmitter will transmit a sixth information sequence with the fourth length and the fourth definition. 309. For the device of scope 36 of the patent application Among them, the transmitter will transmit the sixth information sequence with the third length and the third definition. 0 Printed by the Consumer Consumption Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The third information sequence is MP. 4 1 · The device according to item 27 of the scope of patent application, wherein the fourth information sequence is MPs. 4 2 _ If the device is under the scope of patent application No. 27, wherein the third information sequence is CP. 4 3 · If the device in the scope of patent application No. 27, in which the fourth paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ^-6 Yi " 499809 Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperatives Printing A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Patent application information series is CPS. 4 4 _ If the device is under the scope of patent application No. 27, the third information sequence is C P a 0 4 5. If the device is under the scope of patent application No. 27, wherein the fourth information sequence is C P a s. 4 6 · If the device of the scope of patent application No. 27, the receiver cannot receive the confirmation for the third information sequence within the predetermined event or condition, and the transmitter transmits a fifth length and a fifth definition The fifth information sequence. 4 7. A communication method including the following steps: transmitting at least a first information sequence having a first length and a first definition; and transmitting a second information sequence having a second length and a second definition; wherein the first A length is shorter than the second length, and wherein the first definition includes a type portion to identify the first and second information sequences, and the first parallel portion further includes a confirmation indicator which is used to confirm all Received information sequence. 48. The method according to item 47 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first information sequence is C P s and the second information sequence is C P. 49. The method of claim 47, wherein the first information sequence is C P a s and the second information sequence is C P a. 5 0 · —A kind of data signal embedded in the carrier wave, the data signal includes: The first part, including: This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public director) ~ Γ " First read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) kr Binding and ordering 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8, apply for a patent to surround the first synchronization data section; the first starting data section is connected after the first synchronization data section; The first frame marked data section is connected after the first starting data section; the first confirmation data section is connected after the first frame marked data section; the second starting data section is connected after the first confirmation data section After; the first CRC data section follows the second starting data section; the second section follows the first section, the second section includes: the second synchronous data section; the third starting data The segment is connected after the second synchronized data segment. The second frame marked data segment is connected after the third start data segment. The second confirmation data segment is connected after the second frame marked data segment. The fourth start The first data section follows the second confirmation data section; most parameters The data section follows the fourth start data section; the fifth start data section follows the most parameter data section; and the second CRC data section follows the fifth start data section; where the The second frame mark section indicates that the plurality of parameter data sections follow, and the first and second confirmation data sections can be used to confirm a received data signal. '5 1 ·-A communication device including: receiving A device capable of receiving a first information sequence having a first length and a first definition, followed by the first information sequence is a second information sequence having a second length and a second definition; wherein the first length is longer than the The second length is also long, and each definition includes a confirmation indicator, where each confirmation indicator can be inspected to determine that the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) β (please First read the notes on the reverse side and then fill out this page)-Binding-Order printed by 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. Receiving the information sequence transmitted by the scope of patent application (please first (Please read the notes on the back of the reading and fill in this page again) 5 2 · If the device in the scope of patent application No. 51 includes a transmitter, it can transmit a third information sequence with a third length and a third definition. Following the three information sequence is a fourth information sequence having a fourth length and a fourth definition; wherein the third length is longer than the fourth length. 5 3. For the device of the scope of the patent application No. 51, where The first information sequence is CP a and the second information sequence is CP as. 5 4 · The device according to item 27 of the patent application scope, wherein the first information sequence is CP as and the second information sequence is c P a . 5 5 · —A tandem method for cascading a first device by a second device, the tandem method includes: transmitting a first information sequence to a second device by the first device, the first information sequence having a first type A marker and most of the first serial parameters; receiving a second information sequence from a second device with a first device, the second information sequence having a second type of marker and most of the second serial parameters; consumption by employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The cooperative prints a third information sequence transmitted by a first device to a second device, the third information sequence having a third type marker and a third confirmation marker, wherein the third information sequence is shorter than the first information sequence; and from The second device receives the first information sequence I column by the first device, the fourth information sequence has a fourth type indicator, and a fourth confirmation indicator, wherein the fourth information sequence is shorter than the second information sequence; wherein the third information sequence Make sure that the marker is adjusted by the first device to indicate the reception of the second information sequence when the first device receives the second information sequence, and its paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 regulations (210X297 mm) Τ〇Ί 499809 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The fourth confirmation indicator in the patent application is checked by the first device to determine whether the second device receives the first News sequence. 56. The method of claim 55, further comprising: repeatedly transmitting the third information sequence for a predetermined period until the fourth confirmation indicator indicates that the first information sequence is received by the second device. 57. The method of claim 55, further comprising: if the fourth confirmation indicator does not indicate that the first information sequence is received by the second device, transmitting the first information sequence after the predetermined period has elapsed. 58. The method according to item 57 of the patent application scope, further comprising: repeatedly transmitting the third information sequence for a predetermined period until the fourth confirmation indicator indicates that the first information sequence is received by the second device. 59. The method according to item 55 of the patent application scope, further comprising: repeatedly receiving the fourth information sequence for a predetermined period until the third confirmation indicator indicates that the second information sequence is received by the first device. 60. The method according to item 59 of the scope of patent application, further comprising: if the second confirmation indicator does not indicate that the second information sequence is received by the first device, receiving the second information sequence after the predetermined period has elapsed. 6 1 · The method according to item 60 of the patent application scope, further comprising: repeatedly receiving the fourth information sequence for a predetermined period until the third confirmation indicator indicates that the second information sequence is received by the first device. 62. The method according to item 55 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first type of indicator indicates that the first information sequence is longer than the third information sequence indicated by the third type indicator. 6 3 · If you apply for the method of item No. 55 in the scope of patent application, the second paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm)---------- m-pack- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page), tT 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. The patent application scope type indicator indicates that the second information sequence is longer than the fourth information sequence indicated by the fourth type indicator. 64. The method of claim 55, wherein the first information sequence is a MP frame, and wherein the third information sequence is a μP s frame. 65. The method of claim 55, wherein the first information sequence is a CP frame, and wherein the third information sequence is a c ps frame. 6 6 · The method according to item 55 of the patent application scope, wherein the first information sequence is a C P a box, and wherein the third information sequence is a C p a $ box. · 6 7 · The method according to item 55 of the patent application scope, wherein the second information sequence is a MP frame, and wherein the fourth information sequence is a μ P s frame. : 6 8 · The method according to item 55 of the patent application scope, wherein the second information sequence is a CP frame, and wherein the fourth information sequence is a c p s frame. 69. The method of claim 55, wherein the second information sequence is a C P a box, and wherein the fourth information sequence is a C p a $ box. 7 0 · — A method of initializing an error correction protocol communication, which is used in a data phase, and when the serial phase is between the first device and the second device, the communication method includes the steps of: performing the serial The initial tandem portion of the sequence; | Send one or more parameters that can be used to establish the error correction protocol as part of the tandem phase after the initial sequence; end the tandem phase; enter This data sheet; This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). Α8 Β8 C8 D8 6. The scope of patent application uses one or more parameters to establish the error correction agreement; and | uses the error correction agreement to receive data. 7 1 · The method of claim 70 in the scope of patent application, wherein the erroneous Wu correction agreement includes a data compression agreement. 7 2 · The method according to item 70 of the scope of patent application, wherein the 纟 sound correction protocol is a V · 4 2 agreement, and a signal similar to the V · 4 2 X ID signal is transmitted at the transmitting step. 7 3 · The method according to item 70 of the scope of patent application, wherein the series phase is substantially similar to the V.90 series. ‘7 4 • As in the method of scope 70 of the patent application, one or more parameters are transmitted as part of the C P t signal. 7 5 · If the method of scope 70 of the patent application is applied, one or more parameters are transmitted as part of the CP signal. 76. The method according to item 70 of the scope of patent application, wherein one or more parameters are transmitted as part of the C P s signal. 7 7 · If the method of scope 70 of the patent application is applied, one or more parameters are transmitted as part of the C P a signal. 7 8 · If the method of scope 70 of the patent application is applied, one or more parameters are transmitted as part of the MP signal. 7 9. A first device for initializing an error correction protocol communication. The first device is used in a data phase and is in tandem with a second and second device. The device includes: a processor that executes the serial The initial tandem part of the column; a transmitter that transmits one or more parameters that can be used to establish the paper size of the wrong paper. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _ 12-- -------- I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order printed by the Consumer Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 499809 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 Part of the tandem phase after the initial tandem; and a receiver, wherein the processor ends the tandem phase, enters the data phase, and uses one or more parameters to establish the error correction protocol, and where the The receiving company uses this error correction protocol to receive the data. 80. The device as claimed in claim 79, wherein the error correction agreement includes a data compression agreement. 81. The device according to item 79 of the scope of patent application, wherein the error correction protocol is a V · 4 2 protocol, and a signal similar to the V. 4 2 X ID signal is transmitted at the transmitting step. 82. The device according to item 79 of the scope of patent application, wherein the tandem phase is substantially similar to the V · 90 tandem. 8 3. If the device in the scope of patent application No. 79, one or more parameters are transmitted as part of the C P t signal. 84. If the device in the scope of patent application No. 79, one or more parameters are transmitted as part of the CP signal. Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives II! | II-— ^ _ wl II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 8 5. For the device in the scope of patent application No. 7 or 9, one or Multiple parameters are transmitted as part of the .CP s signal. 8 6 · If the device in the scope of patent application No. 79, one or more parameters are transmitted as part of the C P a signal. / 8 7 · If the device in the scope of patent application No. 79, one or more parameters are transmitted as part of the MP signal. 8 8. If the data signal of item 22 of the scope of patent application, the data signal received is the same as the first part of the data signal. This paper uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _ 13 _ 499809 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Patent application scope 8 9 · If the information signal of the 50th patent application scope, the received information The data signal is the same as the first part of the data signal. 90. A communication device that can support a serial phase and a data phase to communicate with a remote device. The communication device includes: a transmitter that can transmit a first information sequence during the serial phase, The first information sequence has a first-type indicator and most of the first serial parameters. The transmitter can further transmit a second information sequence when the series is phased, and the third information sequence has a third-type indicator and a first Three confirmation markers, in which the third information sequence is shorter than the first information sequence; a receiver that can receive a second information sequence when the serial phase is in phase, the second information sequence having a second type marker and a majority The second serial parameter, the receiver can further receive a fourth information sequence from the second device to the first device, the fourth information sequence has a fourth type marker and a fourth confirmation marker, wherein the fourth information sequence is more than The second information sequence is short; and a processor that can adjust a third confirmation indicator to indicate receipt of the second information sequence to the remote device, the processor can further check the fourth confirmation indicator to determine the Whether the remote device receives the first information sequence. 91. The communication device according to item 90 of the patent application range, wherein the transmitter repeatedly transmits the third information sequence for a predetermined period until the fourth confirmation indicator indicates that the first information sequence is received by the remote device. 92. The communication device according to item 91 of the patent application scope, wherein if the fourth confirmation indicator does not indicate that the first information sequence is received by the remote device, the transmitter transmits the first information sequence after the predetermined period has elapsed. 9 3. If the communication device according to item 92 of the scope of patent application, the paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _ 14 · --------- installation- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page). P. 499809 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy The fourth confirmation indicator indicates that the first information sequence is received by the remote device. 94. The communication device according to item 90 of the patent application range, wherein the receiver repeatedly receives the fourth information sequence for a predetermined period until the third confirmation indicator indicates that the processor receives the second information sequence. 95. The communication device according to item 94 of the scope of patent application, wherein if the second confirmation indicator does not indicate that the processor receives the second information sequence, the receiver receives the second information sequence after the predetermined period has elapsed. . 96. The communication device according to item 95 of the patent application scope, wherein the receiver repeatedly receives the fourth information sequence for a predetermined period 'until the third confirmation indicator indicates that the processor receives the second information sequence. 97. The communication device according to item 90 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first type of indicator indicates that the first information sequence is longer than the third information sequence indicated by the third type indicator. 98. The communication device according to item 90 of the patent application scope, wherein the second type of marker indicates that the second information sequence is longer than the fourth information sequence indicated by the fourth type of marker. 99. The communication device according to item 90 of the patent application scope, wherein the first information sequence is an MP frame and the third information sequence is an MP frame. , 100. The communication device according to item 90 of the patent application scope, wherein the first information sequence is a CP frame and the third information sequence is a CP frame. 1 〇1 If you apply for a communication device with the scope of patent application No. 90, of which (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)-Binding and ordering Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Employee Co-operative Cooperative This paper is applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 × 297 mm) -15- 499809 A8 B8 C8 ____ _ D8 6. Scope of patent application The first information sequence is the CP a box, and the third information sequence is. Pas box. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1 0 2 · If the communication device of the 90th scope of the patent application, the second information sequence is the MP frame, and the fourth information sequence is the MP frame s box. 103. The communication device according to item 90 of the patent application scope, wherein the second information sequence is a CP frame and the fourth information sequence is a CP frame. 104. The communication device as claimed in claim 90, wherein the second information sequence is a C P a frame, and the fourth information sequence is a C P a s frame. 105. The communication device according to claim 90, wherein the first information sequence includes most constellation parameters. 1 06. The communication device according to item 90 of the patent application scope, wherein the first information sequence includes most modulation parameters. 107. The communication device according to item 91 of the scope of patent application, wherein the predetermined period is calculated based on a round-trip delay. Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1 08 · If the method in the scope of patent application No. 55, the first information sequence includes most constellation parameters. 1 0 9 · If the method and method of item 55 of the patent application are applied, the first information sequence includes most modulation parameters. 1 1 0 · The method according to item 56 of the patent application range, wherein the predetermined period is calculated based on a round trip delay. 1 1 1 · If you apply for the method of item 1 of the patent scope, where the first -16- this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 499809 A8 Βδ C8 D8 Includes most constellation parameters. 1 1 2. The method according to item 1 of the patent application range, wherein the first information sequence includes a majority of modulation parameters. 1 1 3. If the data signal of the scope 50 of the patent application, the data signal includes an MP frame and an MP frame. 1 1 4. If the data signal of the scope 50 of the patent application, the data signal includes a CP frame and a CP frame. 1 1 5. If the data signal of the scope 50 of the patent application, the data signal includes a C P a box and a C P a s box. '1 1 6. The data signal of item 50 in the scope of patent application, wherein the data signal includes one MP / frame and one MPs / frame. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)-Binding and printing Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy
TW89118159A 1999-09-10 2000-09-05 Quick connect parameter exchange TW499809B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US09/393,616 US6912276B1 (en) 1999-04-12 1999-09-10 Modem on hold
US09/394,018 US6768791B1 (en) 1999-04-12 1999-09-10 Method and apparatus for quick modem reconnect
US09/416,482 US6785371B1 (en) 1999-04-12 1999-10-12 Signaling mechanism for modem connection holding and reconnecting
US16757299P 1999-11-26 1999-11-26
US09/557,233 US6704399B1 (en) 1999-04-12 2000-04-24 Quick connect parameter exchange

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW499809B true TW499809B (en) 2002-08-21

Family

ID=27538759

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW89118159A TW499809B (en) 1999-09-10 2000-09-05 Quick connect parameter exchange
TW89118158A TW535391B (en) 1999-09-10 2000-09-05 Communication on hold

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW89118158A TW535391B (en) 1999-09-10 2000-09-05 Communication on hold

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (2) TW499809B (en)

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW535391B (en) 2003-06-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7277531B2 (en) Method and apparatus for fast V.90 modem startup
US6842509B2 (en) Signaling mechanism for modem connection holding and reconnecting
US6693998B2 (en) Error correction and compression parameter exchange during modem training phase
JP4637789B2 (en) Fast connection, quick reconnect and connect with hold mechanism
US7174004B1 (en) Network based method and apparatus for supporting interoperability between incompatible TTY devices
JP2001148772A (en) Method and system for quick start in half-duplex mode
US7280528B1 (en) Call setup for IP/Internet telephony
JP2009147929A (en) Arrangement for dynamically diverting communications having characteristics incompatible with communication device to other device
TW499809B (en) Quick connect parameter exchange
JP6006314B2 (en) Method for initiating a non-standard mode for an XDSL transmission system and a residential gateway using the method
JP4183942B2 (en) Quick connection parameter communication
TW536898B (en) Fast connect, quick reconnect and connection on hold mechanism
USRE42661E1 (en) Method and apparatus for fast V.90 modem startup
US20050117594A1 (en) Modem pass-through panacea for voice gateways
EP1223734B1 (en) Initialization a quick reconnect procedure
US20230247136A1 (en) Automated attendant that specifies audio transmission characteristics for calls
WO2001008376A1 (en) Signaling mechanism for modem connection holding and reconnecting
JP2006135553A (en) Communication terminal device and data communication method
MXPA00007273A (en) Call setup for ip/internet telephony

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MK4A Expiration of patent term of an invention patent